2017 MICRA
OWNER’S MANUAL
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with
confidence. It was produced using the latest
techniques and strict quality control.
This manual was prepared to help you under-
stand the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle so that you may enjoy many kilometers
(miles) of driving pleasure. Please read through
this manual before operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet
explains details about the warranties cov-
ering your vehicle. The “Maintenance and
schedules” section of this manual explains
details about maintaining and servicing
your vehicle.
A NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best.
When you require any service or have any ques-
tions, they will be glad to assist you with the
extensive resources available to them.
In addition to factory-installed options, our ve-
hicle may also be equipped with additional ac-
cessories installed prior to delivery. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details
concerning the particular accessories with which
your vehicle is equipped. It is important that you
familiarize yourself with all disclosures, warnings,
cautions and instructions concerning proper use
of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle
and/or accessory. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the
particular accessories with which your vehicle is
equipped.
Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-
iarity with controls and maintenance require-
ments assisting you in the safe operation of your
vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
REMINDERS!
Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
● NEVER drive under the influence of al-
cohol or drugs.
● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for conditions.
●
ALWAYS give your full attention to driving
and avoid using vehicle features or taking
other actions that could distract you.
●
ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-
priate child restraint systems. Preteen
children should be seated in the rear seat.
● ALWAYS provide information about the
proper use of vehicle safety features to
all occupants of the vehicle.
● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.
FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification could affect its
performance, safety or durability and may
even violate governmental regulations. In
addition, damage or performance prob-
lems resulting from modifications may
not be covered under NISSAN warranties.
WARNING
Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diag-
nostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses the
port during normal driving, for example
remote insurance company monitoring,
remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or
engine reprogramming, may cause inter-
ference or damage to vehicle systems. We
do not recommend or endorse the use of
any aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, un-
less specifically approved by NISSAN. The
vehicle warranty may not cover damage
caused by any aftermarket plug-in device.
This manual includes information for all features
and equipment available on this model. Features
and equipment in your vehicle may vary depend-
ing on model, trim level, options selected, order,
date of production, region or availability. There-
fore, you may find information about features or
equipment that are not included or installed on
your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in
this manual are those in effect at the time of
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
specifications, performance, design or compo-
nent suppliers without notice and without obliga-
tion. From time to time, NISSAN may update or
revise this manual to provide Owners with the
most accurate information currently available.
Please carefully read and retain with this manual
all revision updates sent to you by NISSAN to
ensure you have access to accurate and up-to-
date information regarding your vehicle. Current
versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any
updates can also be found in the Owner section
of the NISSAN website at
https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/
navigation/manualsGuide. If you have ques-
tions concerning any information in your Owner’s
Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. For
contact information, refer to the NISSAN CUS-
TOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner’s
Manual.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual. They
are used in the following ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause death or serious
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the
risk, the procedures must be followed
precisely.
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause minor or moder-
ate personal injury or damage to your ve-
hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-
cedures must be followed carefully.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”
or “Do not let this happen.”
If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-
tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the
vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
call attention to an item in the illustration.
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to
Visteon.
© Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form, or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.
APD1005
NISSAN CARES...
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your NISSAN
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to
provide NISSAN directly with comments or
questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-
sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free
number:
1-800-387-0122
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the
following information:
– Your name, address and telephone number
– Vehicle identification number (attached to the
top of the instrument panel on the driver’s
side)
– Date of purchase
– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR
You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
If you prefer, visit us at: www.nissan.ca
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
Table of Contents
Illustrated table of contents
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Instruments and controls
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Starting and driving
In case of emergency
Appearance and care
Do-it-yourself
Maintenance and schedules
Technical and consumer information
Index
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
0 Illustrated table of contents
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ..............0-2
Exterior front ......................................0-3
Exterior rear.......................................0-4
Passenger compartment ...........................0-5
Instrument panel...................................0-6
Engine compartment check locations . . ..............0-8
Warning and indicator lights ........................0-9
1. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-41)
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-41)
3. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-41)
4. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s) and
shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-10, 1-41)
5. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-6)
6. Rear seat belts (P. 1-10)
7. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system (P. 1-21)
8. Seats (P. 1-2)
9. Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) (P. 1-41)
Refer to the page number indicated in pa-
rentheses for operating details.
LII2334
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
1. Engine hood (P. 3-8)
2. Windshield (P. 8-15)
3. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-15)
4. Antenna (P. 4-46)
5. Power windows (if so equipped)
(P. 2-26)
6. Door locks (P. 3-3)
Key fob (if so equipped) (P. 3-5)
Keys (P. 3-2)
7 Mirrors (P. 3-14)
8. Tire pressure (P. 8-31)
Flat tire (P. 6-2)
Tire chains (P. 8-31)
9. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-17)
Daytime running light system (P. 2-17)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-21)
10. Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-17)
Refer to the page number indicated in pa-
rentheses for operating details.
LII2335
EXTERIOR FRONT
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
1. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-21)
2. Rear wiper and washer switch (P. 2-15)
3. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-17)
4. Rear hatch opener (P. 3-9)
5 Rearview monitor (if so equipped)
(P. 4-2)
6. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-10)
Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-10)
Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)
7. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-3)
Refer to the page number indicated in pa-
rentheses for operating details.
LII2336
EXTERIOR REAR
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
1. Sun visors (P. 3-12)
2. Interior lights (P. 2-28)
3. Rearview mirror (P. 3-14)
4. Glove box (P. 2-22)
5. Storage trays (P. 2-22)
Cup holders (P. 2-22)
Refer to the page number indicated in pa-
rentheses for operating details.
LII2375
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
1. Headlight/turn signal switch (P. 2-17)
2. Driver’s supplemental air bag (P. 1-48)
Horn (P. 2-20)
3. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
4. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-15)
5. Center vents (P. 4-8)
6. Rear window and outside mirror (if so
equipped) defroster switch (P. 2-17)
7. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)
8. Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-41)
9. Climate controls (P. 4-8, 4-16)
10. Audio system (P. 4-32, 4-24)
11. Passenger’s supplemental air bag
(P. 1-48)
12. Side vents (P. 4-8)
13. Glove box (P. 2-22)
14. Shift lever (P. 5-8)
15. Cup holders (P. 2-23)
16. 12v power outlet (P. 2-21)
17. USB port (if so equipped) (P. 4-41)
18. Cruise control (if so equipped) (P.5-15)
19. Ignition switch (P. 5-5)
20. Tilt steering (P. 3-12)
LII2367
INSTRUMENT PANEL
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
21. Audio control switches (if so equipped)
(P.4-45)
Bluetooth® hands-free phone system
controls (if so equipped) (P. 4-47)
22. Fuel-filler door release lever (P. 3-10)
Hood release lever (P. 3-8)
23. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-21)
24. Electronic outside rearview mirror con-
trol switch (if so equipped) (P. 3-15)
Refer to the page number indicated in pa-
rentheses for operating details.
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
HR16DE Engine
1. Drive belt location (P. 8-12)
2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-6)
3. Air cleaner (P. 8-14)
4. Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid
reservoir (P. 8-9)
5. Fusible link (P. 8-17)
6. Battery (P. 8-10)
7. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4)
8. Radiator cap (P. 8-4)
9. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-6)
10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-10)
Refer to the page number indicated in pa-
rentheses for operating details.
LDI3055
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
Warning
light
Name Page
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) warn-
ing light
2-8
Brake warning light 2-8
Charge warning light 2-8
Door open warning
light
2-9
Engine oil pressure
warning light
2-9
High temperature
warning light (red)
2-9
Low windshield-
washer fluid warning
light
2-9
Warning
light
Name Page
Power steering
warning light (if so
equipped)
2-9
Seat belt warning
light and chime
2-10
Supplemental air
bag warning light
2-10
Indicator
light
Name Page
Automatic Transmis-
sion position indica-
tor light (A/T models
only)
2-10
Cruise main switch
indicator light (if so
equipped)
2-11
Front fog light indi-
cator light (if so
equipped)
2-11
Indicator
light
Name Page
Front passenger air
bag status light
2-11
High beam indicator
light (blue)
2-11
Malfunction Indica-
tor Light (MIL)
2-11
Overdrive OFF indi-
cator light (A/T
models only)
2-12
Security indicator
light (if so equipped)
2-12
Slip indicator light 2-12
Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights
2-12
Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light
2-12
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
MEMO
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats ............................................1-2
Front manual seat adjustment . . ..................1-3
Armrest (if so equipped for driver’s seat) ..........1-4
Folding rear seat ...............................1-4
Head restraints/headrests ..........................1-6
Adjustable head restraint/headrest
components ...................................1-7
Non-adjustable head restraint/headrest
components ...................................1-7
Remove .......................................1-7
Install .........................................1-8
Adjust.........................................1-8
Seat belts .......................................1-10
Precautions on seat belt usage..................1-10
Seat belt warning light .........................1-12
Pregnant women ..............................1-13
Injured persons................................1-13
Three-point type seat belt with retractor ..........1-13
Seat belt extenders ............................1-18
Seat belt maintenance .........................1-18
Child safety ......................................1-19
Infants........................................1-20
Small children .................................1-20
Larger children ................................1-20
Child restraints ...................................1-21
Precautions on child restraints ..................1-22
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system ..............................1-23
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
LATCH.......................................1-26
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
the seat belts .................................1-28
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH..................................1-30
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts ............................1-33
Booster seats .................................1-38
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ..............1-41
Precautions on SRS ...........................1-41
Supplemental air bag warning labels.............1-58
Supplemental air bag warning light ..............1-58
WARNING
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back and
upright in the seat with both feet on the
floor and adjust the seat properly. For
additional information, refer to “Pre-
cautions on seat belt usage” in this
section.
● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls or make the
vehicle move. Unattended children
could become involved in serious
accidents.
● To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave
children, people who require the assis-
tance of others or pets unattended in
your vehicle. Additionally, the tempera-
ture inside a closed vehicle on a warm
day can quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury or
death to people and pets.
● Do not adjust the driver’s seat while
driving so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation. The seat may move
suddenly and could cause loss of con-
trol of the vehicle.
● The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort. Seat
belts are most effective when the pas-
senger sits well back and straight up in
the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
being injured is increased.
ARS1152
SEATS
1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For
additional information about adjusting the seats,
refer to the steps outlined in this section.
Forward and backward
Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you
slide the seat forward or backward to the desired
position. Release the bar to lock the seat in
position.
Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean
back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever
up and lean your body forward. Release the lever
to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Pre-
cautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also,
the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants
to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position with the
parking brake fully applied.
LRS2459 LRS2460
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s
seat)
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust
the seat height until the desired position is
achieved.
ARMREST (if so equipped for driver’s
seat)
To use the armrest, pull it down to the resting
position.
FOLDING REAR SEAT
Ensure the rear outboard seat belt webbing is
properly stowed in the clip which is located at
inside trim
䊊
1
before moving the rear seatback
䊊
2
in order to prevent the outboard seat belt from
getting caught behind the rear seatback.
LRS2764 LRS2760
Folding rear seat 60/40
LRS2446
1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
䊊
1
Remove head restraint/headrest from the
rear seatback.
䊊
2
Pull the strap
䊊
A
to fold each seatback
down.
䊊
3
To return the rear seat to a seating position,
lift up on the seatback and push it up to an
upright position. Firmly press zones
䊊
A
and
䊊
B
to lock the seatback in place.
䊊
4
Install the head restraint/headrest.
WARNING
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seat when it is in the
fold-down position. Use of these areas
by passengers without proper restraints
could result in serious injury or death in
an accident or sudden stop.
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-
lision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
● When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched posi-
tion. If they are not completely secured,
passengers may be injured in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
● Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
hatch where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and hatch securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
Folding rear seat 60/40
LRS2440
LRS2441
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
WARNING
Head restraints/headrests supplement
the other vehicle safety systems. They may
provide additional protection against in-
jury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust-
able head restraints/headrests must be
adjusted properly, as specified in this sec-
tion. Check the adjustment after someone
else uses the seat. Do not attach anything
to the head restraint/headrest stalks or
remove the head restraint/headrest. Do
not use the seat if the head
restraint/headrest has been removed. If
the head restraint/headrest was removed,
reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position. Failure to fol-
low these instructions can reduce the ef-
fectiveness of the head
restraints/headrests. This may increase
the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision.
The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with head restraints/headrests.
䉱 Indicates the seating position is equipped with
a head restraint.
䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped with
a headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped
with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable).
● Your vehicle is equipped with a head
restraint/headrest that may be integrated,
adjustable or non-adjustable.
● Adjustable head restraints/headrests have
multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock
them in a desired adjustment position.
● The non-adjustable head
restraints/headrests have a single locking
notch to secure them to the seat frame.
● Proper Adjustment:
– For the adjustable type, align the head
restraint/headrest so the center of your
ear is approximately level with the center
of the head restraint/headrest.
– If your ear position is still higher than the
recommended alignment, place the head
restraint/headrest at the highest position.
● If the head restraint/headrest has been re-
moved, ensure that it is reinstalled and
locked in place before riding in that desig-
nated seating position.
LRS2000
HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS
1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/
HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Multiple notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD
RESTRAINT/HEADREST
COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Single notch
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
REMOVE
Use the following procedure to remove the head
restraint/headrest:
1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the
highest position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from
the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in
a secure place so it is not loose in the
vehicle.
LRS2300 LRS2299 LRS2302
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant uses
the seating position.
INSTALL
1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with
the holes in the seat. Make sure that the
head restraint/headrest is facing the correct
direction. The stalk with the notch (notches)
䊊
1
must be installed in the hole with the lock
knob
䊊
2
.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint/headrest
before an occupant uses the seating posi-
tion.
ADJUST
For adjustable head restraint/headrest
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center
is level with the center of your ears. If your ear
position is still higher than the recommended
alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at
the highest position.
LRS2303 WRS0134
1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-
tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch
before riding in that designated seating position.
Raise
To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-
tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch
before riding in that designated seating position.
Lower
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint/headrest down.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-
tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch
before riding in that designated seating position.
LRS2351 LRS2305 LRS2306
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-
justed and you are sitting upright and well back in
your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances
of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the
severity of injury may be greatly reduced.
NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your
passengers to buckle up every time you drive,
even if your seating position includes a supple-
mental air bag.
Most Canadian provinces or territories
specify that seat belts be worn at all times
when a vehicle is being driven.
WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times. Children should be in the rear
seats and in an appropriate restraint.
SSS0136 SSS0016
SEAT BELTS
1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
● The seat belt should be properly ad-
justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
reduce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an acci-
dent. Serious injury or death can occur if
the seat belt is not worn properly.
WARNING
● Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never put the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck. The
belt should be away from your face and
neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low and snug as
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could
increase the risk of internal injuries in
an accident.
SSS0134 SSS0014
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely
fastened to the proper buckle.
● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
● Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
● Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.
● If the seat belt warning light glows con-
tinuously while the ignition is turned
ON with all doors closed and all seat
belts fastened, it may indicate a mal-
function in the system. Have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
● No changes should be made to the seat
belt system. For example, do not modify
the seat belt, add material, or install
devices that may change the seat belt
routing or tension. Doing so may affect
the operation of the seat belt system.
Modifying or tampering with the seat
belt system may result in serious per-
sonal injury.
● Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have ac-
tivated, they cannot be reused and must
be replaced together with the retractor.
It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
● All seat belt assemblies, including re-
tractors and attaching hardware, should
be inspected after any collision it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. NISSAN recom-
mends that all seat belt assemblies in
use during a collision be replaced un-
less the collision was minor and the
belts show no damage and continue to
operate properly. Seat belt assemblies
not in use during a collision should also
be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
● All child restraints and attaching hard-
ware should be inspected after any col-
lision. Always follow the restraint
manufacturer’s inspection instructions
and replacement recommendations.
The child restraints should be replaced
if they are damaged.
SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT
Both the driver’s and passenger’s front seats are
equipped with a seat belt warning light. The warn-
ing light, located on the instrument panel, will show
the status of the driver and passenger seat belt.
NOTE:
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt
warning light will not light up if the front
passenger seat is not occupied.
For additional information, refer to “Warning
lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in
the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
LRS0786
1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and
always position the lap belt as low as possible
around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder
belt over your shoulder and across your chest.
Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-
dominal area. Contact your doctor for specific
recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times. Children should be in the rear
seats and in an appropriate restraint.
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back and
upright in the seat with both feet on the
floor and adjust the seat belt properly.
● Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat
belt becomes wrapped around a child’s
neck with the ALR mode activated, the
child can be seriously injured or killed if
the seat belt retracts and becomes
tight. This can occur even if the vehicle
is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to
release the child. If the seat belt cannot
be unbuckled or is already unbuckled,
release the child by cutting the seat belt
with a suitable tool (such as a knife or
scissors) to release the seat belt.
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. For additional information,
refer to “Seats” in this section.
Manual front seat shown
LRS2459
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the tongue into the buckle
䊊
A
until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
● The retractor is designed to lock dur-
ing a sudden stop or on impact. A
slow pulling motion permits the seat
belt to move, and allows you some
freedom of movement in the seat.
● If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
the belt and release it. Then
smoothly pull the belt out of the re-
tractor.
3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug
on the hips
䊊
B
as shown.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
retractor to take up extra slack
䊊
C
. Be sure
the shoulder belt is routed over your shoul-
der and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear seating
positions’ three-point seat belts have two modes
of operation:
● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and
retract to allow the driver and passengers some
freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks
the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly
or during certain impacts.
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the
seat belt for child restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode
after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional
information, refer to “Child restraints” in this sec-
tion.
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During normal
seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode
should not be activated. If it is activated, it
may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-
sion. It can also change the operation of
the front passenger air bag. For additional
information, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section.
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that the seatbacks are completely secured
in the latched position. If they are not
completely secured, passengers may be
injured in an accident or sudden stop.
LRS2674 LRS2675
1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on the
buckle
䊊
1
. The seat belt automatically retracts.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt
movement by two separate methods:
● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the
retractor
● When the vehicle slows down rapidly
To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
check the operation as follows:
● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and re-
strict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check,
get the system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service or to
learn more about seat belt operation.
Center of the rear bench seat
The center seat belt has a connector tongue
䊊
1
and a seat belt tongue
䊊
2
. Both the connector
tongue and the seat belt tongue must be securely
latched for proper seat belt operation.
WRS0139 SSS0240
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
WARNING
● Always fasten the connector tongue
and the seat belt in the order shown.
● Always make sure both the connector
tongue and the seat belt tongue are
secured when using the seat belt or
installing a child restraint. Do not use
the seat belt or child restraint with only
the seat belt tongue attached. This
could result in serious personal injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop.
Stowing the center seat belt
When folding down the rear seat, the rear center
seat belt can be retracted into a stowed position.
1. Hold the connector tongue
䊊
1
so that the
seat belt does not retract suddenly when the
tongue is released from the connector
buckle. Release the connector tongue by
inserting a suitable tool such as a key
䊊
2
into
the connector buckle.
2. Retract the seat belt and store the seat belt
tongue on the stowed position
䊊
3
.
WARNING
Do not unfasten the rear center seat belt
connector except when folding down the
rear seat.
SSS0241
LRS8100
1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Attaching the center seat belt
Always be sure the center seat belt connector
tongue and connector buckle are attached. Dis-
connect only when folding down the rear seat.
To connect the buckle:
1. Pull the seat belt tongue and connector
tongue from the stowed position
䊊
1
.
2. Pull the seat belt and secure the connector
buckle until it clicks
䊊
2
.
The center seat belt connector tongue can be
attached only into the rear center seat belt con-
nector buckle.
To fasten the seat belt, refer to “Fastening the
seat belts” in this section.
WARNING
●
When attaching the rear center seat belt
connector, be certain that the seatbacks
are completely secured in the latched po-
sition and the rear center seat belt con-
nector is completely secured.
●
If the rear center seat belt connector and
the seatbacks are not secured in the cor-
rect position, serious personal injury may
result in an accident or sudden stop.
● Make sure to wear the rear center seat
belt with the seat belt passing through
the path
䊊
A
.
LRS8101
LRS8102
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
Shoulder belt height adjustment (front
seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-
justed to the position best for you. For additional
information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt
usage” in this section. To adjust, pull out the
adjustment button
䊊
1
and move the shoulder belt
anchor to the desired position
䊊
2
, so the belt
passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt
should be away from your face and neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment
button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into posi-
tion.
WARNING
● After adjustment, release the adjust-
ment button and try to move the shoul-
der belt anchor up and down to make
sure it is securely fixed in position.
● The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best for you.
Failure to do so may reduce the effec-
tiveness of the entire restraint system
and increase the chance or severity of
injury in an accident.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is
not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt
and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with
the installed seat belts is available for purchase.
The extender adds approximately 200 mm (8 in)
of length and may be used for either the driver or
front passenger seating position. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for assis-
tance with purchasing an extender if an extender
is required.
WARNING
● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made
by the same company which made the
original equipment seat belts, should
be used with NISSAN seat belts.
● Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use could
result in serious personal injury in the
event of an accident.
● Never use seat belt extenders to install
child restraints. If the child restraint is
not secured properly, the child could be
seriously injured or killed in a collision
or a sudden stop.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution recom-
mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.
Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
seat belts to retract until they are completely
dry.
LRS0242
1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
● If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
● Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-
sembly should be replaced.
WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the seat
belts. Most seating positions are equipped
with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes
wrapped around a child’s neck with the ALR
mode activated, the child can be seriously
injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and
becomes tight. This can occur even if the
vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to
release the child. If the seat belt cannot be
unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release
the child by cutting the seat belt with a
suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to
release the seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in this
manual, child safety information is available from
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
to learn the best way to transport your child.
There are three basic types of child restraint
systems:
● Rear-facing child restraint
● Forward-facing child restraint
● Booster seat
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less
than 9 kg (20 lbs) should be placed in rear-facing
child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints
are available for children who outgrow rear-
facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.
Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer
use a forward-facing child restraint.
WARNING
Infants and children need special protec-
tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit
them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The lap
belt may not fit over their small hip bones.
In an accident, an improperly fitting seat
belt could cause serious or fatal injury.
Always use appropriate child restraints.
CHILD SAFETY
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
All Canadian provinces or territories require the
use of approved child restraints for infants and
small children. For additional information, refer to
“Child restraints” in this section.
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by
using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle
seat belt. For additional information, refer to
“Child restraints” in this section.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
Studies show that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than in
the front seat.
This is especially important because your
vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-
tem (air bag system) for the front passen-
ger. For additional information, refer to
“Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in
this section.
INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-
mends that infants be placed in child restraints
that comply with Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. You should choose a child restraint
that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-
facturer’s instructions for installation and use.
SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at
least 9 kg (20 lbs) should remain in a rear-facing
child restraint as long as possible up to the height
or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who
outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear-
facing child restraint and are at least 1 year old
should be secured in a forward-facing child re-
straint with a harness. Refer to the manufactur-
er’s instructions for minimum and maximum
weight and height recommendations. NISSAN
recommends that small children be placed in
child restraints that comply with Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a
child restraint that fits your vehicle and always
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for instal-
lation and use.
LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
restraint with a harness until they reach the maxi-
mum height or weight limit allowed by the child
restraint manufacturer.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit
of the harness-equipped forward-facing child re-
straint, NISSAN recommends that the child be
placed in a commercially available booster seat to
obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit
properly, the booster seat should raise the child
so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned
across the chest and the top, middle portion of
the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross
the neck or face and should not fall off the shoul-
der. The lap belt should lie snugly across the
lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A
booster seat can only be used in seating posi-
tions that have a three-point type seat belt. The
booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have
a label certifying that it complies with Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
A booster seat should be used until the child can
pass the seat belt fit test below:
● Are the child’s back and hips against the
vehicle seatback?
● Is the child able to sit without slouching?
● Do the child’s knees bend easily over the
front edge of the seat with feet flat on the
floor?
● Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap
belt low and snug across the hips and shoul-
der belt across mid-chest and shoulder)?
● Is the child able to use the properly adjusted
head restraint/headrest?
● Will the child be able to stay in position for
the entire ride?
1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
If you answered no to any of these questions, the
child should remain in a booster seat using a
three-point type seat belt.
NOTE:
Laws in some communities may follow dif-
ferent guidelines. Check local and state
regulations to confirm your child is using
the correct restraint system before travel-
ing.
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat
and do not allow a child in the cargo area.
The child could be seriously injured or
killed in a sudden stop or collision.
LRS2690 ARS1098
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
● Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use and installa-
tion of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– The child restraint must be used and
installed properly. Always follow all
of the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
– Infants and children should never be
held on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-
gest adult cannot resist the forces of
a collision.
– Do not put a seat belt around both a
child and another passenger.
– NISSAN recommends that all child
restraints be installed in the rear
seat. Studies show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat. If you
must install a forward-facing child
restraint in the front seat, refer to
“Forward-facing child restraint in-
stallation using the seat belts” in this
section.
– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front seat.
An inflating air bag could seriously
injure or kill a child. A rear-facing
child restraint must only be used in
the rear seat.
– Be sure to purchase a child restraint
that will fit the child and vehicle.
Some child restraints may not fit
properly in your vehicle.
– Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage
the child restraint anchorages. The
child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged anchor-
age, and a child could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision.
– Never use the anchor points for adult
seat belts or harnesses.
– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the front
passenger seat.
– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-
sible after fitting the child restraint.
– Infants and children should always
be placed in an appropriate child re-
straint while in the vehicle.
● When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, loose objects can injure occupants
or damage the vehicle.
WRS0256
1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
become very hot. Check the seating sur-
face and buckles before placing a child in
the child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child
restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-
tem. Some child restraints include rigid or
webbing-mounted attachments that can be con-
nected to these anchors. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Teth-
ers for CHildren) system” in this section.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for
infants and children of various sizes. When se-
lecting any child restraint, keep the following
points in mind:
● Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
that it complies with Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213.
● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
● If the child restraint is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the child restraint is compatible with
your child. Choose a child restraint that is
designed for your child’s height and weight.
Always follow all recommended procedures.
● If the combined weight of the child and child
restraint is less than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), you
may use either the LATCH anchors or the
seat belt to install the child restraint (not both
at the same time).
● If the combined weight of the child and child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-
chors) to install the child restraint.
● Be sure to follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions for installation.
All Canadian provinces or territories re-
quire that infants and small children be
restrained in an approved child restraint at
all times while the vehicle is being oper-
ated. Canadian law requires the top tether
strap on forward-facing child restraints be
secured to the designated anchor point on
the vehicle.
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with LATCH system compat-
ible child restraints. This system may also be
referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible
system. With this system, you do not have to use
a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint
unless the combined weight of the child and child
restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and child restraint is
greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) use the vehicle’s
seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the
LATCH system lower anchor locations
LRS2761
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
The LATCH anchor points are provided to install
child restraints in the rear outboard seating posi-
tions only. Do not attempt to install a child re-
straint in the center position using the LATCH
anchors.
LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-
tions for proper use and installation of
child restraints could result in serious in-
jury or death of a child or other passen-
gers in a sudden stop or collision:
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations
shown in the illustration.
– Do not secure a child restraint in the
center rear seating position using the
LATCH lower anchors. The child re-
straint will not be secured properly.
– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-
ing your fingers into the lower anchor
area. Feel to make sure there are no
obstructions over the anchors such
as seat belt webbing or seat cushion
material. The child restraint will not
be secured properly if the lower an-
chors are obstructed.
– Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage
the child restraint anchorages. The
child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged anchor-
age, and a child could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision.
LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear
of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is
attached to the seatback to help you locate the
LATCH lower anchors.
LATCH lower anchor location
WRS0700
1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Installing child restraint LATCH lower
anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include two
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
be connected to two anchors located at certain
seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-
tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to
secure the child restraint. Check your child re-
straint for a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the in-
structions provided by the child restraint manu-
facturer.
When installing a child restraint, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this manual and
those supplied with the child restraint.
Top tether anchor point locations
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used to at-
tach adult seat belts, or other items or
equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could
damage the child restraint anchorages.
The child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged anchorage,
and a child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision.
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
LRS0661
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
LRS0662
LRS2467
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
The child restraint top tether strap must be used
when installing the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchor attachments or seat belts. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Installing top tether
strap” in this section.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap child restraint, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
For additional information, refer to all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child
restraints” sections of this manual before install-
ing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds
65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the
lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be
sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
erly attached to the lower anchors.
LRS2444
Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2
WRS0801
1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
3. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attach-
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child re-
straint should not move more than 25 mm
(1 in), from side to side. Try to tug it forward
and check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is
not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment
as necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint or try installing by
using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable).
Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve-
hicles.
Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
WRS0802
Rear-facing – step 3
LRS0673
Rear-facing – step 4
LRS0674
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
5. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1
through 4.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child
restraints” sections of this manual before install-
ing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds
65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the
lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be
sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear
seats:
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
Rear-facing – step 1
WRS0256
1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions for belt routing.
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It
reverts to the ELR mode when the seat belt
is fully retracted.
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
Rear-facing – step 2
WRS0761
Rear-facing – step 3
LRS2395
Rear-facing – step 4
LRS2396
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
5. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while
pulling up on the seat belt.
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 25 mm (1 in), from side
to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see
if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt
as necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1
through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint
mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
For additional information, refer to all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child
restraints” sections of this manual before install-
ing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds
65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the
lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be
sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
Rear-facing – step 5
WRS0762
Rear-facing – step 6
LRS2397
1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
erly attached to the lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. For additional information, refer to “In-
stalling top tether strap” in this section.
Do not install child restraints that require the
use of a top tether strap in seating positions
that do not have a top tether anchor.
3. The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child
restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is
removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure
to reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed. For
additional information about head
restraint/headrest adjustment, refer to
“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is
interfering with the proper child restraint fit,
try another seating position or a different
child restraint.
Forward-facing webbing-mounted – step 2
WRS0799
Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
WRS0800
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
4. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attach-
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child re-
straint should not move more than 25 mm
(1 in), from side to side. Try to tug it forward
and check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is
not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment
as necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.
7. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1
through 6.
Forward-facing – step 4
LRS0671
Forward-facing – step 6
WRS0697
1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
䊊
1
Top tether strap
䊊
2
Anchor point
Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be used
when installing the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchor attachments.
First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchors (rear outboard positions only).
Rear bench seat
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and
store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when the child
restraint is removed. For additional informa-
tion about head restraint/headrest adjust-
ment, removal and installation, refer to ⬙Head
restraints/headrests⬙ in this section.
2. Position the top tether strap
䊊
1
over the
seatback.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point
䊊
2
on the rear-parcel shelf behind the
child restraint.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used to at-
tach adult seat belts, or other items or
equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could
damage the child restraint anchorages.
The child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged anchorage,
and a child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the operation
of the front passenger air bag. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Front passen-
ger air bag and status light” in this section.
Outboard seating positions
LRS2656
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
For additional information, refer to all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child
restraints” sections of this manual before install-
ing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds
29.5 kg (65 lbs). If the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is greater than
29.5 kg (65 lbs), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not
the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be
sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the
rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in
the rear-facing direction and, there-
fore, must not be used in the front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child
restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is
removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure
to reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed. For
additional information about head
restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and
installation, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is
interfering with the proper child restraint fit,
try another seating position or a different
child restraint.
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
step 1
WRS0699
1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions for belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. For additional information, refer to “In-
stalling top tether strap” in this section.
Do not install child restraints that require the
use of a top tether strap in seating positions
that do not have a top tether anchor.
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It
reverts to ELR mode when the seat belt is
fully retracted.
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
Forward-facing – step 3
WRS0680
Forward-facing – step 4
LRS0667
Forward-facing – step 5
LRS0668
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while pulling up on the seat
belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 25mm (1 in), from side
to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see
if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt
as necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.
9. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2
through 8.
Forward-facing – step 6
WRS0681
Forward-facing – step 8
WRS0698
1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
status light
should illuminate. If this
light is not illuminated, refer to “Front pas-
senger air bag and status light” in this sec-
tion. Move the child restraint to another
seating position. Have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-
straint mode) is canceled.
䊊
1
Top tether strap
䊊
2
Anchor point
Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be used
when installing the child restraint with the seat
belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.
Rear bench seat
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and
store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when the child
restraint is removed. For additional informa-
tion about head restraint/headrest adjust-
ment, removal and installation, refer to
“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.
2. Position the top tether strap
䊊
1
over the
seatback.
Forward-facing — step 10
WRS0475
Outboard seating positions
LRS2656
Center seating position
LRS2657
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point
䊊
2
on the bottom of the seatback
behind the child restraint.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
CENTER SEATING POSITION
1. Position the top tether strap
䊊
1
over the
seatback.
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point
䊊
2
on the rear tail panel behind the
child restraint.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used to at-
tach adult seat belts, or other items or
equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could
damage the child restraint anchorages.
The child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged anchorage,
and a child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision.
BOOSTER SEATS
For additional information on installing a booster
seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions out-
lined in this section.
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not used
properly, the risk of a child being injured
or killed in a sudden stop or collision
greatly increases:
– Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s face
and neck and the lap portion of the
belt does not cross the stomach.
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the child’s
arm.
– A booster seat must only be installed
in a seating position that has a
lap/shoulder belt.
1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
A. Low back booster seat
B. High back booster seat
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
several manufacturers. When selecting any
booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
● Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Canadian Mo-
tor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
● Make sure the child’s head will be properly
supported by the booster seat or vehicle
seat. The seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle
seatback must be at or above the center of
the child’s ears. If the seatback is lower than
the center of the child’s ears, a high back
booster seat should be used.
● If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place the child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with the
child. Always follow all recommended pro-
cedures.
LRS2479 LRS0453 LRS0464
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
All Canadian provinces or territories re-
quire that infants and small children be
restrained in an approved child restraint at
all times while the vehicle is being oper-
ated.
The instructions in this section apply to booster
seat installation in the rear seats or the front
passenger seat.
Booster seat installation
WARNING
To avoid injury to child, do not use the
lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Lock-
ing Retractor (ALR) mode when using a
booster seat with the seat belts.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child safety”, “Child re-
straints” and “Booster seats” sections of this
manual before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the
rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, move the seat to the rear-
most position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
place it in a front-facing direction. Always
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions.
3. The booster seat should be positioned on
the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct
booster seat fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint/headrest when the
booster seat is removed. For additional
information about head restraint/headrest
adjustment, removal and installation, refer to
“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.
WRS0699
Front passenger position
LRS0454
1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is
interfering with the proper booster seat fit,
try another seating position or a different
booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-
tions for properly fastening a seat belt
shown in “Three-point type seat belt with
retractor” in this section.
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
status light
may or may not illuminate,
depending on the size of the child and the
type of booster seat being used. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Front passenger
air bag and status light” in this section.
PRECAUTIONS ON SRS
This SRS section contains important information
concerning the following systems:
● Driver and front passenger supplemental
front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System)
● Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag
● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
mental air bag
● Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)
Supplemental front-impact air bag system
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help
cushion the impact force to the head and chest of
the driver and front passenger in certain frontal
collisions.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to
the chest area of the driver and front passenger in
certain side impact collisions. The side air bags
are designed to inflate on the side where the
vehicle is impacted.
WRS0475
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS)
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to
the head of occupants in front and rear outboard
seating positions in certain side-impact colli-
sions. The curtain air bags are designed to inflate
on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
The SRS is designed to supplement the crash
protection provided by the driver and front pas-
senger seat belts and is not a substitute for
them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn
and the occupant seated a suitable distance
away from the steering wheel, instrument panel
and door finishers. For additional information
about instructions and precautions on seat belt
usage, refer to “Seat belts” in this section.
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-
onds if the system is operational.
WARNING
● The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact, rear
impact, rollover, or lower severity fron-
tal collision. Always wear your seat
belts to help reduce the risk or severity
of injury in various kinds of accidents.
● The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit or if the front passenger seat
is unoccupied. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag
and status light” in this section.
●
The seat belts and the front air bags are
most effective when you are sitting well
back and upright in the seat. The front air
bags inflate with great force. Even with
the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if
you are unrestrained, leaning forward,
sitting sideways or out of position in any
way, you are at greater risk of injury or
death in a crash. You may also receive
serious or fatal injuries from the front air
bag if you are up against it when it in-
flates. Always sit back against the seat-
back and as far away as practical from
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Always properly use the seat belts.
WRS0031
1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
● The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
monitors the severity of a collision and
seat belt usage, then inflates the air
bags as needed. Failure to properly
wear seat belts can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
● The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) that turns the front pas-
senger air bag OFF under some condi-
tions. This sensor is only used in this
seat. Failure to be properly seated and
wearing the seat belt can increase the
risk or severity of injury in an accident.
For additional information, refer to
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” in this section.
● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-
ing wheel. Placing them inside the
steering wheel rim could increase the
risk that they are injured when the front
air bag inflates.
ARS1133
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
WARNING
● Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043
1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
● Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens
and children should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat, if possible.
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An in-
flating front air bag could seriously in-
jure or kill your child. For additional
information, refer to “Child restraints”
in this section.
ARS1044 ARS1045 WRS0256
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain
side-impact supplemental air bags:
● The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event of
a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or
lower severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce the
risk or severity of injury in various kinds
of accidents.
WARNING
● The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective when
you are sitting well back and upright in
the seat with both feet on the floor. The
side air bag and curtain air bag inflate
with great force. Do not allow anyone to
place their hand, leg or face near the
side air bag on the side of the seatback
of the front seat or near the side roof
rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats to
extend their hand out of the window or
lean against the door. Some examples
of dangerous riding positions are
shown in the previous illustrations.
WRS0431 SSS0162
1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
● When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front seat.
If the side air bag inflates, you may be
seriously injured. Be especially careful
with children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
● Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with side
air bag inflation.
WRS0032 SSS0159 SSS0162
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
1. Crash zone sensor
2. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules
3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
4. Occupant classification sensor (weight sen-
sor – located in front passenger seat cush-
ion frame)
5. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag modules
6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
mental air bag
7. Rear side satellite sensor
8. Side satellite sensor
9. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)
10. Front door satellite sensor (pressure sensor)
(driver’s side shown; front passenger side
similar)
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the front
passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag
System, please observe the following
items.
● Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket.
● Do not place heavy loads heavier than
2.2 kg (1 lb) on the seatback, head
restraint/headrest or in the seatback
pocket.
● Do not store luggage behind the seat
that can press into the seatback.
● Confirm the operating condition with
the front passenger air bag status light.
● If you notice that the front passenger air
bag status light is not operating, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer to check the occupant classifica-
tion system.
● Until you have confirmed with a dealer
that your passenger seat occupant clas-
sification system is working properly,
position the occupants in the rear seat-
ing positions.
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front
passenger seats. This system is permitted in
Canada. However, all of the information,
cautions and warnings in this manual still
apply and must be followed.
LRS8106
1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is
located in the center of the steering wheel. The
front passenger supplemental front-impact air
bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove
box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in
higher severity frontal collisions, although they
may inflate if the forces in another type of collision
are similar to those of a higher severity frontal
impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal
collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not
always an indication of proper front air bag sys-
tem operation.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors
information from the crash zone sensor, the Air
bag Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors
and occupant classification sensor (weight sen-
sor). Inflator operation is based on the severity of
a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For
the front passenger, the occupant classification
sensors are also monitored. Based on informa-
tion from the sensors, only one front air bag may
inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity
and whether the front occupants are belted or
unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air
bag may be automatically turned off under some
conditions, depending on the weight detected on
the front passenger seat and how the seat belt is
used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the
front passenger air bag status light will be illumi-
nated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not
be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). For
additional information, refer to “Front passenger
air bag and status light” in this section. One front
air bag inflating does not indicate improper per-
formance of the system.
If you have any questions about your air bag
system, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer to obtain information about the
system. If you are considering modification of
your vehicle due to a disability, you may also
contact NISSAN. Contact information is con-
tained in the front of this Owner’s Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise
may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the face and
chest of the front occupants. They can help save
lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an
inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions
or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide
restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat
belts should be correctly worn and the driver and
front passenger seated upright as far as practical
away from the steering wheel or instrument
panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to
help protect the front occupants. Because of this,
the force of the front air bag inflating can increase
the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or
is against, the front air bag module during infla-
tion.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-
onds if the system is operational.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
Front passenger air bag and status light
WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF under some condi-
tions. Read this section carefully to learn
how it operates. Proper use of the seat,
seat belt and child restraints is necessary
for most effective protection. Failure to
follow all instructions in this manual con-
cerning the use of seats, seat belts and
child restraints can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
Status light
The front passenger seat is equipped with an
occupant classification sensor (weight sensor)
that turns the front passenger air bag on or off
depending on the weight applied to the front
passenger seat. The status of the front passen-
ger air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by the front
passenger air bag status light
which is
located on the instrument panel.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ⬙ON⬙
position, the front passenger air bag status light
on the instrument panel illuminates for about
7 seconds and then turns off or remains illumi-
nated depending on the front passenger seat
occupied status. The light operates as follows:
● Unoccupied front passenger’s seat:
The
light is OFF and the front passen-
ger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a
crash.
● Front passenger seat occupied by a small
adult, child or child restraint as outlined in
this section: The
light illuminates to
indicate that the front passenger air bag is
OFF and will not inflate in a crash.
● Occupied front passenger seat and the pas-
senger meets the conditions as outlined in
this section: The
light is OFF to indi-
cate that the front passenger air bag is op-
erational.
In addition to the above, certain objects placed
on the front passenger seat may also cause the
light to operate as described above depending
on their weight.
For additional information related to the normal
operation and troubleshooting of this occupant
classification sensor system, please refer to
“Normal operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this
section.
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-
matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated
under some conditions as described below in
accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front
passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a
crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your
vehicle are not part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such
as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-
matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to
meet the requirements.
The occupant classification sensor in this vehicle
is a weight sensor. It is designed to detect an
occupant and objects on the seat by weight. For
example, if a child is in the front passenger seat,
the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System is de-
WRS0475
1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
signed to turn the front passenger air bag OFF in
accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child
restraint of the type specified in the regulations is
on the seat, its weight and the child’s weight can
be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
properly seated and using the seat belt as out-
lined in this manual should not cause the front
passenger air bag to be automatically turned
OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,
however if the occupant takes his/her weight off
the seat cushion (for example, by not sitting up-
right, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by
otherwise being out of position), this could cause
the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be
sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt
properly for the most effective protection by the
seat belt and supplemental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-
dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child
restraints and booster seats be properly installed
in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant
classification sensor is designed to operate as
described above to turn the front passenger air
bag OFF for specified child restraints as required
by the regulations. Failing to properly secure
child restraints and to use the ALR mode may
allow the restraint to tip or move in a collision or
sudden stop. This can also result in the passen-
ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being
OFF. For additional information about proper use
and installation, refer to “Child restraints” in this
section.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the
front passenger air bag is designed not to inflate
in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
the object’s weight detected by the occupant
classification sensor. Other conditions could also
result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants
are seated and restrained properly.
Using the front passenger air bag status light, you
can monitor when the front passenger air bag is
automatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.
The light will not illuminate when the front pas-
senger seat is unoccupied.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the front
passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indi-
cating that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat
properly or not using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
the front passenger air bag status light may or
may not be illuminated, depending on the size of
the child and the type of child restraint being
used. If the air bag status light is not illuminated
(indicating that the air bag might inflate in a
crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat
belt is not being used properly. Make sure that
the child restraint is installed properly, the seat
belt is used properly and the occupant is posi-
tioned properly. If the air bag status light is still not
illuminated, reposition the occupant or child re-
straint in a rear seat.
If the front passenger air bag status light will not
illuminate even though you believe that the child
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are
properly positioned, the system may be sensing
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is
OFF). A NISSAN dealer can check that the sys-
tem is OFF by using a special tool. However, until
you have confirmed with a dealer that your air bag
is working properly, reposition the occupant or
child restraint in a rear seat.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and front
passenger air bag status light will take a few
seconds to register a change in the front passen-
ger seat status. For example, if a large adult who
is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the
vehicle, the front passenger air bag status light
will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and
then to OFF. This is normal system operation and
does not indicate a malfunction.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
light
, located in the meter and gauges area
of the instrument panel, will blink. Have the sys-
tem checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Normal operation
In order for the occupant classification sensor
system to classify the front passenger based on
weight, please follow the precautions and steps
outlined below:
Precautions
● Make sure that there are no objects weigh-
ing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hanging on the seat or
placed in the seatback pocket.
● Make sure that a child restraint or other
object is not pressing against the rear of the
seatback.
● Make sure that a rear passenger is not push-
ing or pulling on the back of the front pas-
senger seat.
● Make sure that the front passenger seat or
seatback is not forced back against an ob-
ject on the seat or floor behind it.
● Make sure that there is no object placed
under the front passenger seat.
Steps
1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”
section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning
against the seatback, and centered on the
seat cushion with your feet comfortably ex-
tended to the floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the “Seat
belts” section of this manual.
4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds al-
lowing the system to classify the front pas-
senger before the vehicle is put into motion.
5. Ensure proper classification by checking the
front passenger air bag status light.
NOTE:
This vehicle’s occupant classification sen-
sor system locks the classification during
driving so it is important that you confirm
that the front passenger is properly classi-
fied prior to driving. Also, the occupant
classification sensor system may recalcu-
late the weight of the occupant when the
vehicle comes to a stop (i.e. stop light, stop
sign, etc.), so front passenger seat occu-
pants should continue to remain seated as
outlined above.
Troubleshooting
If you think the front passenger air bag status light
is incorrect:
1. If the light is ON with no front passenger and
no objects on the front passenger seat:
This may be due to the following conditions that
may be interfering with the weight sensors:
● An object weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hang-
ing on the seat or placed in the seatback
pocket.
● A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
● A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the
back of the front passenger seat.
● Forcing the front seat or seatback against an
object on the seat or floor behind it.
● An object placed under the front passenger
seat.
● An object placed between the seat cushion
and center console or between the seat
cushion and the door.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop
when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of
the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and
wait 1 minute.
1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the vehicle should
be checked as soon as possible. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
2. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the
front passenger seat:
● Occupant is a small adult — the air bag light
is functioning as intended. The front passen-
ger air bag is suppressed.
However, if the occupant is not a small adult, then
this may be due to the following conditions that
may be interfering with the weight sensors:
● Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning
against the seatback, and centered on the
seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably
extended to the floor.
● A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
● A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the
back of the front passenger seat.
● Forcing the front seat or seatback against an
object on the seat or floor behind it.
● An object placed under the front passenger
seat.
● An object placed between the seat cushion
and center console or between the seat
cushion and the door.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop
when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of
the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and
wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the person should
be advised not to ride in the front passenger seat
and the vehicle should be checked as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
3. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child or
child restraint occupying the front passen-
ger seat.
This may be due to the following conditions
that may be interfering with the weight sen-
sors:
● Small adult or child is not sitting upright,
leaning against the seatback, and centered
on the seat cushion with his/her feet com-
fortably extended to the floor.
● The child restraint is not properly installed,
as outlined in the “Child restraints” section of
this manual.
● An object weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hang-
ing on the seat or placed in the seatback
pocket.
● A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
● A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the
back of the front passenger seat.
● Forcing the front seat or seatback against an
object on the seat or floor behind it.
● An object placed under the front passenger
seat.
● An object placed between the seat cushion
and center console.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop
when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of
the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and
wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still OFF after this, the small adult,
child or child restraint should be repositioned in
the rear seat and the vehicle should be checked
as soon as possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag
precautions
WARNING
● Do not place any objects on the steering
wheel pad or on the instrument panel.
Also, do not place any objects between
any occupant and the steering wheel or
instrument panel. Such objects may be-
come dangerous projectiles and cause
injury if the front air bags inflate.
● Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will be
hot. Do not touch them; you may se-
verely burn yourself.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This is
to prevent accidental inflation of the
supplemental air bag or damage to the
supplemental air bag system.
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-
pension system or front end structure.
This could affect proper operation of
the front air bag system.
● Tampering with the front air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
Tampering includes changes to the
steering wheel and the instrument
panel assembly by placing material
over the steering wheel pad and above
the instrument panel or by installing
additional trim material around the air
bag system.
● Removing or modifying the front pas-
senger seat may affect the function of
the air bag system and result in serious
personal injury.
● Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing mate-
rial on the seat cushion or by installing
additional trim material, such as seat
covers, on the seat that are not specifi-
cally designed to assure proper air bag
operation. Additionally, do not stow any
objects under the front passenger seat
or the seat cushion and seatback. Such
objects may interfere with the proper
operation of the occupant classification
sensor (weight sensor).
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect the
front air bag system. Tampering with
the seat belt system may result in seri-
ous personal injury.
1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
● It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the front air bag. It is also recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for installation of electrical equipment.
The Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be
modified or disconnected. Unauthor-
ized electrical test equipment and prob-
ing devices should not be used on the
air bag system.
● A cracked windshield should be re-
placed immediately by a qualified repair
facility. A cracked windshield could af-
fect the function of the supplemental air
bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the front air bag system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and roof-
mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag systems
The side air bags are located within the outboard
side of the front seatback. The curtain air bags
are located in the side roof rails. All of the
information, cautions and warnings in this
manual must be followed. The side air bags
and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in
higher severity side collisions, although they may
inflate if the forces in another type of collision are
similar to those of a higher severity impact. They
are designed to inflate on the side where the
vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in cer-
tain side collisions.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper side air bag and curtain air
bag operation.
When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed
by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken
not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breathing con-
dition should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the chest of
the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to
cushion the impact force to the head of occu-
pants in the front and rear outboard seating po-
sitions. They can help save lives and reduce
serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag
and curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other
injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not
provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and passenger seated upright as far as
practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat
passengers should be seated as far away as
practical from the door finishers and side roof
rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate
LRS0259
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55
quickly in order to help protect the front and rear
outboard occupants. Because of this, the force of
the side air bag and curtain air bag inflating can
increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too
close to, or is against, these air bag modules
during inflation. The side air bags and curtain air
bags will deflate quickly after the collision is over.
The side air bags and curtain air bags op-
erate only when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-
onds if the system is operational.
WARNING
● Do not place any objects near the seat-
back of the front seats. Also, do not
place any objects (an umbrella, bag,
etc.) between the front door finisher
and the front seat. Such objects may
become dangerous projectiles and
cause injury if a side air bag inflates.
● Right after inflation, several side air bag
and curtain air bag system components
will be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems. This is to prevent damage to or
accidental inflation of the side air bag
and curtain air bag or damage to the
side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-
pension system or side panel. This
could affect proper operation of the
side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
● Tampering with the side air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
For example, do not change the front
seats by placing material near the seat-
backs or by installing additional trim
material, such as seat covers, around
the side air bag.
● It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the side air bag and curtain air bag. It is
also recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for installation of elec-
trical equipment. The SRS wiring har-
nesses* should not be modified or dis-
connected. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the side air bag or cur-
tain air bag systems.
* The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the side air bag and
curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to
the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.
1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
WARNING
● The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused
after activation. They must be replaced
together with the retractor and buckle
as a unit.
● If the vehicle becomes involved in a
collision but pretensioner(s) are not ac-
tivated, be sure to have the preten-
sioner system checked and, if neces-
sary, replaced. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the pretensioner system. This is to pre-
vent damage to or accidental activation
of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with
the pretensioner system may result in
serious personal injury.
● It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the pretensioner system. It is also rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for installation of electrical
equipment. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the pretensioner system.
● If you need to dispose of the preten-
sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Incorrect dis-
posal procedures could cause personal
injury.
The pretensioner system may activate with the
supplemental air bag system in certain types of
collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor,
the pretensioner(s) help tighten the seat belt
when the vehicle becomes involved in certain
types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat
occupants.
The pretensioner(s) are encased within the seat
belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor affixed
to the floor of the vehicle. These seat belts are
used the same way as conventional seat belts.
When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-
leased and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load limiters
allow the seat belt to release webbing (if neces-
sary) to reduce forces against the chest.
The supplemental air bag warning light
is
used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner
system. For additional information, refer to
⬙Supplemental air bag warning light⬙ in this sec-
tion. If the operation of the supplemental air bag
warning light indicates there is a malfunction,
have the system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the pretensioner system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57
1. SRS Air bag warning labels
The warning labels are located on the sur-
face of the sun visors.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental front-
impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as
shown in the illustration.
WARNING
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an air bag in front of it.
If the air bag deploys, it may cause serious
injury or death.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying
in the instrument panel, moni-
tors the circuits for the air bag systems and all
related wiring.
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START
position, the supplemental air bag warning light
illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off. This means the system is operational.
WRS0897 LRS0100
1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag needs servicing:
● The supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
● The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
● The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the front air bag may not
operate properly. It must be checked and re-
paired. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag
will not operate in an accident. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Repair and replacement procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags
and pretensioner(s) are designed to inflate on a
one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is
damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light
remains illuminated after inflation has occurred.
These systems should be repaired and/or re-
placed as soon as possible. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When maintenance work is required on the ve-
hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
bags, pretensioner(s) and related parts should be
pointed out to the person performing the mainte-
nance. The ignition switch should always be
placed in the LOCK position when working under
the hood or inside the vehicle.
WARNING
● Once a front air bag, side air bag, or
curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag
module will not function again and
must be replaced. Additionally, the acti-
vated pretensioner(s) must also be re-
placed. The air bag module and preten-
sioner(s) should be replaced. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. However, the air
bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot
be repaired.
● The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
air bag systems and the pretensioner
system should be inspected if there is
any damage to the front end or side
portion of the vehicle. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
● If you need to dispose of the supple-
mental air bag or pretensioner systems
or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Incorrect
disposal procedures could cause per-
sonal injury.
● If there is an impact to your vehicle from
any direction, your Occupant Classifica-
tion Sensor (OCS) should be checked to
verify it is still functioning correctly. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. The OCS should
be checked even if no air bags deploy as
a result of the impact. Failure to verify
proper OCS function may result in an
improper air bag deployment resulting
in injury or death.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59
MEMO
1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
2 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel...................................2-2
Meters and gauges ................................2-3
Speedometer and odometer .....................2-4
Tachometer ....................................2-5
Fuel gauge ....................................2-5
Trip computer ..................................2-6
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders.........................................2-7
Checking lights ................................2-7
Warning lights .................................2-8
Indicator lights ................................2-10
Audible reminders .............................2-13
Security systems .................................2-13
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system .............2-13
Wiper and washer switch .........................2-15
Switch operation ..............................2-15
Rear switch operation..........................2-16
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
defroster switch ..................................2-17
Headlight and turn signal switch....................2-17
Headlight control switch........................2-17
Daytime running light system....................2-18
Instrument brightness control ...................2-19
Turn signal switch .............................2-19
Front fog lights (if so equipped) .................2-20
Horn ............................................2-20
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch...........2-21
Power outlet .....................................2-21
Storage .........................................2-22
Front-door pockets ............................2-22
Storage trays (if so equipped)...................2-22
Glove box ....................................2-23
Cup holders ..................................2-23
Cargo cover (if so equipped)....................2-24
Windows ........................................2-26
Power windows (if so equipped) ................2-26
Manual windows (if so equipped)................2-28
Interior light ......................................2-28
Luggage compartment light........................2-29
1. Headlight/turn signal switch (P. 2-17)
2. Driver’s supplemental air bag (P. 1-48)
Horn (P. 2-20)
3. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
4. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-15)
5. Center vents (P. 4-8)
6. Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
(P. 2-17)
7. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)
8. Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-41)
9. Climate controls (P. 4-8, 4-16)
10. Audio system (P. 4-32, 4-24)
11. Passenger’s supplemental air bag
(P. 1-48)
12. Side vents (P. 4-8)
13. Glove box (P. 2-22)
14. Shift lever (P. 5-8)
15. Cup holders (P. 2-23)
16. 12v power outlet (P. 2-21)
17. USB port (if so equipped) (P. 4-41)
18. Cruise control (if so equipped) (P.5-15)
19. Ignition switch (P. 5-5)
20. Tilt steering (P. 3-12)
LII2367
INSTRUMENT PANEL
2-2 Instruments and controls
21. Audio control switches (if so equipped)
(P.4-45)
Bluetooth® hands-free phone system
controls (if so equipped) (P. 4-47)
22. Fuel-filler door release lever (P. 3-10)
Hood release lever (P. 3-8)
23. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-21)
24. Electronic outside rearview mirror con-
trol switch (if so equipped) (P. 3-15)
Refer to the page number indicated in pa-
rentheses for operating details.
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Odometer
Trip computer
4. Instrument brightness control knob
5. Change/reset button
LIC3356
METERS AND GAUGES
Instruments and controls 2-3
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and
odometer. The speedometer is located in the
center of the meter cluster. The odometer is
located within the trip computer.
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed.
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
The odometer
䊊
2
records the total distance the
vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer
䊊
3
records the distance of
individual trips.
Changing the display
Press the change button
䊊
1
to change the dis-
play as follows:
Odo → Trip A → Trip B → Ins fuel consumption →
Average fuel consumption → Cruising range or
(DTE) → Odo
For trip computer information, refer to “Trip com-
puter” in this section.
Resetting the trip odometer
Press the change/reset button
䊊
1
for more than
1 second to reset the currently displayed trip
odometer to zero.
LIC3419 LIC3420
2-4 Instruments and controls
Loose fuel cap warning message
Push the change/reset button
䊊
A
for more than
1 second to reset the LOOSE FUEL CAP warn-
ing message after the fuel cap has been tight-
ened. For additional information, refer to “Fuel-
filler cap” in the “Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section of this manual.
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-
lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engine
into the red zone
䊊
1
.
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-
gine speed. Operating the engine in the
red zone may cause serious engine
damage.
FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates
䊊
A
the approximate fuel
level in the tank when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position.
When one segment remains on the digital fuel
gauge, only one segment will blink. When no
segments remain on the digital fuel gauge, the
fuel gauge symbol and the scale will blink. This
indicates that the fuel lever is low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-
ters 0 (Empty).
The
indicates that the fuel-filler door is
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
LIC3498 LIC2107 LIC3422
Instruments and controls 2-5
CAUTION
● If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
check engine light may come on. Refuel
as soon as possible. After a few driving
trips, the
light should turn off. If
the light remains on after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
● For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
this section.
TRIP COMPUTER
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, modes of the trip computer can be
selected by pushing the trip computer
change/reset button
䊊
A
on the instrument panel
located near the speedometer. The following
modes can be selected in the display
䊊
B
:
● Instant fuel consumption
● Average fuel consumption
● Distance to empty
Instant fuel consumption
The instant fuel consumption mode shows the
instant fuel economy. The display updates in-
stantly when driving.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption mode shows the
average fuel consumption since the last reset.
Resetting is done by pressing the change/reset
button
䊊
A
for more than approximately 1 second.
Distance to empty
The distance to empty mode provides you with an
estimation of the distance that can be driven
before refueling. The range is constantly being
calculated, based on the amount of fuel in the fuel
tank and the actual fuel consumption.
The distance to empty includes a low range
warning feature: when the fuel level is low, the
distance to empty is automatically selected and
the digits blink in order to draw the driver’s atten-
tion. Press the trip computer change/reset button
䊊
A
if you wish to return to the mode that was
selected before the warning occurred.
When the fuel level drops even lower, the dis-
tance to empty will display (----).
Trip computer reset
Pressing the change/reset button for more than
3 seconds will reset all modes except Trip A and
distance to empty.
LIC3421
2-6 Instruments and controls
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light Power steering warning light (if so equipped) High beam indicator light (blue)
Brake warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Charge warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Overdrive OFF indicator light (A/T models only)
Door open warning light
Automatic Transmission position indicator light
(A/T models only)
Security indicator light (if so equipped)
Engine oil pressure warning light
Cruise main switch indicator light (if so
equipped)
Slip indicator light
High temperature warning light (red) Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
Low windshield-washer fluid warning light Front passenger air bag status light
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator
light
CHECKING LIGHTS
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake,
fasten the seat belts and place the ignition switch
in the ON position without starting the engine.
The following lights (if so equipped) will come on:
, , , ,
The following lights (if so equipped) come on
briefly and then go off:
,
If any light fails to come on or operate in a way
other than described, it may indicate a burned-
out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the
system checked. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Some indicators and warnings are also displayed
in the trip computer located to the right of the
speedometer. For additional information, refer to
“Meters and gauges” in this section.
WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR
LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Instruments and controls 2-7
WARNING LIGHTS
This vehicle has various warning lights that may
illuminate to indicate a potential problem. For
additional information, refer to the specific light in
this section.
Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the ABS warning light illuminates and
then turns off. This indicates the ABS is opera-
tional.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the
engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the
system checked. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-
tion is turned off. The brake system then operates
normally, but without anti-lock assistance. For
additional information, refer to “Brake system” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Brake warning light
This light functions for both the parking brake and
the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light comes on when the parking
brake is applied.
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.
If the light comes on while the engine is running,
with the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-
hicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid
as necessary. For additional information, re-
fer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
warning system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-
vice.
WARNING
● Your brake system may not be working
properly if the warning light is on. Driv-
ing could be dangerous. If you judge it
to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest
service station for repairs. Otherwise,
have your vehicle towed because driv-
ing it could be dangerous.
● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-
gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping dis-
tance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
● If the brake fluid level is below the
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is running,
it may indicate the charging system is not func-
tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check
the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,
missing, or if the light remains on, have the sys-
tem checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the generator
belt is loose, broken or missing.
2-8 Instruments and controls
Door open warning light
This light comes on when any of the doors are not
closed securely while the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
Engine oil pressure warning
light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the
light flickers or comes on during normal driving,
pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine
immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other
authorized repair shop.
The engine oil pressure warning light is not
designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the
dipstick to check the oil level. For additional in-
formation, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause se-
rious damage to the engine almost imme-
diately. Such damage is not covered by
warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it
is safe to do so.
High temperature warning light
(red)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the high temperature warning light illu-
minates and then turns off. This indicates that the
high temperature sensor in the engine coolant
system is operational.
CAUTION
If the high temperature warning light illu-
minates while the engine is running, it
may indicate the engine temperature is
extremely high. Stop the vehicle safely as
soon as possible. If the vehicle is over-
heated, continuing vehicle operation may
seriously damage the engine. For addi-
tional information, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.
Low windshield-washer fluid
warning light
This light comes on when the windshield-washer
fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid
as necessary. For additional information, refer to
“Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
Power steering warning light (if
so equipped)
WARNING
● If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the steering will not work. Steering will
be harder to operate.
● When the power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running,
there will be no power assist for the
steering. You will still have control of
the vehicle, but the steering will be
harder to operate. Have the power
steering system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the power steering warning light illumi-
nates. After starting the engine, the power steer-
ing warning light turns off. This indicates the
power steering is operational.
If the power steering warning light illuminates
while the engine is running, it may indicate the
power steering is not functioning properly and
may need servicing. Have the power steering
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Instruments and controls 2-9
When the power steering warning light illumi-
nates with the engine running, there will be no
power assist for the steering, but you will still
have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater
steering effort is required to operate the steering
wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low
speeds.
For additional information, refer to “Power steer-
ing” in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
Seat belt warning light and
chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten your
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the ON or START
position and remains illuminated until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened.
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if
the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened
when the front passenger’s seat is occupied .
For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in
the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this manual.
Supplemental air bag warning
light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or
START position, the supplemental air bag warn-
ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then
turns off. This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and preten-
sioner seat belt systems need servicing:
● The supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
● The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
● The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for these services.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental
restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-
tensioner(s) may not function properly. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Supplemental Re-
straint System (SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system” section
of this manual.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-
sioner systems will not operate in an acci-
dent. To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
INDICATOR LIGHTS
This vehicle has various indicator lights that may
illuminate to indicate a system status. For addi-
tional information, refer to the specific light in this
section.
Automatic Transmission
position indicator light (A/T
models only)
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
this indicator light shows the shift lever position.
For additional information, refer to “Driving the
vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
2-10 Instruments and controls
Cruise main switch indicator
light (if so equipped)
The light comes on when the cruise control main
switch is pushed. The light goes out when the
main switch is pushed again. When the cruise
main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise
control system is operational.
For additional information, refer to “Cruise con-
trol” in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
Front fog light indicator light (if
so equipped)
The front fog light indicator light illuminates when
the front fog lights are on. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Fog light switch” in this section.
Front passenger air bag status
light
The front passenger air bag status light will
be lit and the passenger front air bag will be OFF
depending on how the front passenger seat is
being used.
For additional information, refer to “Front passen-
ger air bag and status light” in the “Safety —
Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-
tem” section of this manual.
High beam indicator light
(blue)
This blue light comes on when the headlight high
beams are on and goes out when the low beams
are selected.
The high beam indicator light also comes on
when the passing signal is activated.
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate a
potential emission control malfunction.
The
may also come on steady if the fuel-
filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs
out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap
is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle
has at least 3 gal (11.4 L) of fuel in the fuel tank.
After a few driving trips, the
light should
turn off if no other potential emission control
system malfunction exists.
If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 sec-
onds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the
engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle
is not ready for an emission control system
inspection/maintenance test. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Readiness for
inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the “Tech-
nical and consumer information” section of this
manual.
Operation
The MIL will come on in one of two ways:
● MIL on steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected. Check the
fuel-filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP
warning appears in the trip computer. If the
fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or
install the cap and continue to drive the
vehicle. The
light should turn off after
a few driving trips. If the
light does not
turn off after a few driving trips, have the
vehicle inspected. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
You do not need to have your vehicle towed
to the dealer.
● MIL blinking — An engine misfire has been
detected which may damage the emission
control system. To reduce or avoid emission
control system damage:
– do not drive at speeds above 45 mph
(72 km/h).
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
Instruments and controls 2-11
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled or towed.
The MIL may stop blinking and come on steady.
Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the
dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without hav-
ing the emission control system checked
and repaired as necessary could lead to
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,
and possible damage to the emission con-
trol system.
Overdrive OFF indicator light
(A/T models only)
This light comes on when the overdrive function
is OFF.
The automatic transmission overdrive function is
controlled by the overdrive switch.
For additional information, refer to “Driving the
vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
Security indicator light (if so
equipped)
This light blinks when the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position.
The blinking security indicator light indicates that
the security systems equipped on the vehicle are
operational.
For additional information, refer to “Security sys-
tems” in this section.
Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system is operating, thus alerting
that the vehicle is nearing its traction limits. The
road surface may be slippery.
Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal
switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned
on.
Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light
This indicator light comes on when the VDC OFF
switch is pushed to off. This indicates the VDC
system has been turned off.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
engine and the system will operate normally. For
additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driv-
ing” section of this manual.
The VDC indicator light also comes on when you
place the ignition switch in the ON position. The
light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the
system is operational. If the light stays on or
comes on along with the
indicator light
while you are driving, have the VDC system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
While the VDC system is operating, you might
feel a slight vibration or hear the system working
when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this
is normal.
2-12 Instruments and controls
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.
When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it
makes a high pitched scraping sound when the
vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake
pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.
Key reminder chime
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened
while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove
the key and take it with you when leaving the
vehicle.
Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-
tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is
opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-
ing the vehicle.
Parking brake reminder chime
A chime sounds if the parking brake is set and the
vehicle is driven. The chime will stop if the parking
brake is released or the vehicle speed returns to
zero.
Your vehicle has a security system:
● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of a
registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automatic payment device on the key
ring), restart the engine using the following pro-
cedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the ON
position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-
rate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
LIC0301
SECURITY SYSTEMS
Instruments and controls 2-13
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-
tion is subject to the following two condi-
tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-
ference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the de-
vice.
Security indicator light (if so equipped)
The security indicator light blinks whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF, LOCK or
ACC position.
This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Im-
mobilizer System is operational.
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-
functioning, the light will remain on while the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
If the light still remains on and/or the en-
gine will not start, seek service for the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-
vice as soon as possible. Please bring all
registered keys that you have. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
LIC0474
2-14 Instruments and controls
SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solu-
tion may freeze on the windshield and
obscure your vision which may lead to an
accident. Warm the windshield with the
defroster before you wash the windshield.
CAUTION
● Do not operate the washer continuously
for more than 30 seconds.
● Do not operate the washer if the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
empty.
● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with windshield-washer fluid
concentrates at full strength. Some
methyl alcohol based windshield-
washer fluid concentrates may perma-
nently stain the grille if spilled while
filling the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir.
● Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-
centrates with water to the manufactur-
er’s recommended levels before pour-
ing the fluid into the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir. Do not use the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir to
mix the windshield-washer fluid con-
centrate and water.
The windshield wiper and washer operates when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
following speed:
䊊
1
Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation
can be adjusted by turning the knob toward
䊊
A
(Slower) or
䊊
B
(Faster).
䊊
2
Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation
䊊
3
High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-
tion
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC3028
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC2130
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
Instruments and controls 2-15
Push the lever up
䊊
4
to have one sweep opera-
tion (MIST) of the wiper.
Pull the lever toward you
䊊
5
to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.
REAR SWITCH OPERATION
The rear window wiper and washer operate when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position
to operate the wiper.
䊊
1
Intermittent (INT) – intermittent operation
(not adjustable)
䊊
2
ON – continuous low speed operation
Push the switch forward
䊊
3
to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solu-
tion may freeze on the window and ob-
scure your vision. Warm the rear window
with the defroster before you wash the
rear window.
CAUTION
● Do not operate the washer continuously
for more than 30 seconds.
● Do not operate the washer if the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
empty.
● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with windshield-washer fluid
concentrates at full strength. Some
methyl alcohol based windshield-
washer fluid concentrates may perma-
nently stain the grille if spilled while
filling the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir.
LIC2398
2-16 Instruments and controls
● Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-
centrates with water to the manufactur-
er’s recommended levels before pour-
ing the fluid into the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir. Do not use the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir to
mix the windshield-washer fluid con-
centrate and water.
To defrost the rear window glass and outside
mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and
push the rear window defroster switch on. The
rear window defroster indicator light on the
switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn
the defroster off.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 15 minutes.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or dam-
age the rear window defroster.
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
䊊
1
Rotate the switch to the position, and
the front parking, tail, license plate, and in-
strument panel lights will come on.
䊊
2
Rotate the switch to the position, and
the headlights will come on and all the other
lights remain on.
LIC2116 LIC3237
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
Instruments and controls 2-17
CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
Headlight beam select
䊊
1
To select the high beam function, engage the
low beams, then push the lever forward. The
high beam lights come on and the
indicator light illuminates (blue). For addi-
tional information, refer to “Headlight control
switch” in this section.
䊊
2
Pull the lever back to return to the low
beams.
䊊
3
Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the
headlight high beams on and off. The low
beams need not be on for this function.
Battery saver system
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position
while the headlight switch is in the
or position, the headlights will turn off after
a period of time.
CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature au-
tomatically turns off the headlights after a
period of time, you should turn the head-
light switch to the OFF position when the
engine is not running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-
duced intensity when the engine is started with
the parking brake released. The daytime running
lights operate with the headlight switch in the
OFF position. Turn the headlight switch to
the
or position for full illumination
when driving at night.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-
nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when
the parking brake is released. The daytime run-
ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position.
LIC3245
2-18 Instruments and controls
WARNING
When the daytime running light system is
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not
on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your
headlights. Failure to do so could cause
an accident injuring yourself and others.
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
The instrument brightness control operates when
the headlight control switch is in the
or position.
Push the control
䊊
A
to adjust the brightness of
instrument panel lights when driving at night.
When the ignition is on and the knob is pushed,
the illumination decreases. The brightness will
return to the maximum level when the brightness
is at its minimum and the knob is pushed.
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Turn signal
䊊
1
Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is com-
pleted, the turn signal cancels automatically.
NOTE:
In case of a turn signal light malfunction,
the turn signal indicator will flash at a
higher frequency when the turn signal is
activated.
LIC3430 LIC3254
Instruments and controls 2-19
Lane change signal
䊊
2
Move the lever up or down until the turn
signal begins to flash, but the lever does not
latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever
until the lane change is completed.
Move the lever up or down until the turn
signal begins to flash, but the lever does not
latch, and release the lever. The turn signal
will automatically flash three times.
Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane
change based on road and traffic conditions.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
To turn the front fog lights on, rotate the headlight
switch to the
or position, then rotate
the fog light switch to the
position.
To turn them off, rotate the fog light switch to the
OFF position.
To sound the horn, push near the horn icon on the
steering wheel.
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system. Tam-
pering with the supplemental front air bag
system may result in serious personal
injury.
LIC3262 LIC2163
HORN
2-20 Instruments and controls
The vehicle should be driven with the VDC sys-
tem on for most driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC
system reduces the engine output to reduce
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If
maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck
vehicle, turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF
switch. The
indicator will come on.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
engine to turn on the system. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
system” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
The power outlet is for powering electrical acces-
sories such as cellular telephones. The outlet is
rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.
CAUTION
● The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
● Only certain power outlets are designed
for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do
not use any other power outlet for an
accessory lighter. For additional infor-
mation, it is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer.
● Do not use with accessories that exceed
a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
● Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
● Use power outlets with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
● Avoid using power outlets when the air
conditioner (if so equipped), headlights
or rear window defroster (if so
equipped) is on.
● Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.
● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature
fuse may open.
● When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
liquid to contact the outlet.
LIC3344 LIC2715
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH
POWER OUTLET
Instruments and controls 2-21
FRONT-DOOR POCKETS
STORAGE TRAYS (if so equipped)
WARNING
Do not place sharp objects in the trays to
help prevent injury in an accident or sud-
den stop.
LIC0799
Storage compartment
LIC2113
Instrument panel
LIC3429
STORAGE
2-22 Instruments and controls
GLOVE BOX
Open the glove box by pulling the handle.
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
CUP HOLDERS
CAUTION
● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.
LIC2160
Front
LIC2743
Rear
LIC3431
Instruments and controls 2-23
Soft bottle holder
CAUTION
● Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident.
● Do not use bottle holder for open liquid
containers.
CARGO COVER (if so equipped)
WARNING
● Never put anything on the cargo cover,
no matter how small. Any object on it
could cause an injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
● Do not put objects heavier than 20 kg
(44 lbs) on the cargo cover for long
periods of time.
● Do not leave the cargo cover in the
vehicle with it disengaged from the
holder.
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-
lision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
● Your child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if the child restraint
top tether strap is damaged.
– If the cargo cover contacts the top
tether strap when it is attached to the
top tether anchor, remove the cargo
cover from the vehicle or secure it on
the cargo floor below its attachment
location. If the cargo cover is not re-
moved, it may damage the top tether
strap during a collision.
– Do not allow cargo to contact the top
tether strap when it is attached to the
top tether anchor. Properly secure
the cargo so it does not contact the
top tether strap. Cargo that is not
properly secured or that contacts the
top tether strap may damage the top
tether strap during a collision.
The cargo cover keeps the luggage compartment
contents hidden from the outside.
Front
LIC2788
2-24 Instruments and controls
To remove the cargo cover:
䊊
1
Remove the straps from the rear hatch.
䊊
2
Remove the cargo cover holders from the
rear pillar.
Rotate and remove the cargo cover without
touching surrounding parts.
To insert the cargo cover:
1. Insert cargo cover
䊊
1
rotating it so it doesn’t
touch surrounding parts.
2. Rotate the cargo cover
䊊
2
parallel over the
cargo area.
3. Insert cargo cover
䊊
3
on the rear pillars.
4. Reattach the straps to the rear hatch.
LIC3349
LIC2774
Instruments and controls 2-25
POWER WINDOWS (if so equipped)
WARNING
● Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while
it is in motion and before closing the
windows. Use the window lock switch to
prevent unexpected use of the power
windows.
● To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadvertent
door lock activation, do not leave chil-
dren, people who require the assistance
of others or pets unattended in your
vehicle. Additionally, the temperature
inside a closed vehicle on a warm day
can quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury or
death to people and pets.
The power windows operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, or for a
period of time after the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s
door is opened during this period of time, the
power to the windows is canceled.
1. Left rear passenger’s window switch
2. Driver’s side automatic switch
3. Window lock button
4. Power door lock switch
5. Front passenger’s side window switch
6. Right rear passenger’s window switch
Driver’s side power window switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped with
switches to open or close the front and rear
passenger windows.
To open a window, push the switch and hold it
down. To close a window, pull the switch and
hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function
at any time, simply release the switch.
LIC3432
WINDOWS
2-26 Instruments and controls
Front passenger’s power window
switch
The passenger’s window switch operates only
the corresponding passenger’s window. To open
the window, push the switch and hold it down
䊊
1
.
To close the window, pull the switch up
䊊
2
.
Rear power window switch
The rear power window switches open or close
only the corresponding windows. To open the
window, push the switch and hold it down
䊊
1
.To
close the window, pull the switch up
䊊
2
.
Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock switch is depressed, only
the driver’s side window can be opened or
closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock
function.
Automatic operation
To fully open a window equipped with automatic
operation, push the window switch down to the
second detent and release it; it need not be held.
The window automatically opens all the way. To
stop the window, lift the switch up while the
window is opening.
WIC0260 WIC0261 LIC0410
Instruments and controls 2-27
MANUAL WINDOWS (if so equipped)
The side windows can be opened or closed by
turning the hand crank on each door.
The interior light has a three-position switch and
operates regardless of ignition switch position.
When the switch is in the ON position
䊊
3
, the
interior lights illuminate, regardless of door posi-
tion. The lights will go off after a period of time
unless the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
ON position (if so equipped).
When the switch is in the DOOR position
䊊
2
, the
interior lights will stay on for a period of time
when:
● The doors are unlocked by the key fob, a key
or the power door lock switch while all doors
are closed and the ignition switch is placed
in the OFF position.
● The driver’s door is opened and then closed
while the key is removed from the ignition
switch.
● The key is removed from the ignition switch
while all doors are closed.
The lights will turn off while the timer is activated
when:
● The driver’s door is locked by the key fob, a
key, or the power door lock switch.
● The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-
sition.
When the switch is in the OFF position
䊊
1
, the
interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door
position.
The lights will turn off automatically after a period
of time while doors are open to prevent the bat-
tery from becoming discharged.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
LIC3352 LIC2126
INTERIOR LIGHT
2-28 Instruments and controls
The light illuminates when the rear hatch is
opened. When the rear hatch is closed, the light
will turn off.
The light also illuminates with other interior lights
when the interior light switch is in the DOOR
position. For additional information, refer to “Inte-
rior light” in this section.
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT
Instruments and controls 2-29
MEMO
2-30 Instruments and controls
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys.............................................3-2
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys .........3-2
Doors ............................................3-3
Locking with key................................3-3
Locking with inside lock knob ....................3-4
Locking with power door lock switch
(if so equipped) ................................3-4
Automatic door locks (if so equipped). . . ..........3-5
Child safety rear door lock.......................3-5
Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped).........3-5
How to use remote keyless entry system ..........3-6
Hood ............................................3-8
Rear hatch (Hatchback) ............................3-9
Opening the rear hatch..........................3-9
Fuel-filler door ...................................3-10
Opener operation..............................3-10
Fuel-filler cap .................................3-10
Steering wheel ...................................3-12
Tilt operation ..................................3-12
Sun visors .......................................3-12
Vanity mirrors (if so equipped)...................3-13
Card holder (driver’s side only)
(if so equipped) ...............................3-13
Mirrors ..........................................3-14
Rearview mirror ...............................3-14
Outside mirrors ...............................3-14
1. Master key
2. Transponder chip
3. Key number plate
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose
your keys, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key
number. NISSAN does not record key numbers
so it is very important to keep track of your key
number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all your keys. If you still have a key, it can be
duplicated without knowing the key number.
1. Integrated door lock key fob
2. Key number plate
CAUTION
Do not leave the ignition key inside the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose
your keys, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key
number. NISSAN does not record key numbers
so it is very important to keep track of your key
number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated
without knowing the key number.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS
You can only drive your vehicle using the keys
which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Im-
mobilizer System components in your vehicle.
A mechanical key can be used for all the locks.
Never leave the keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System keys. Your existing key can
be duplicated without knowing the key number.
As many as four NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System keys can be used with one vehicle. You
should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
tem keys that you have to a NISSAN dealer for
registration. This is because the registration pro-
cess will erase the memory of all key codes
previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System. After the registration pro-
Type A (if so equipped)
LPD0348
Type B—Remote keyless entry key fob
(if so equipped)
LPD2045
KEYS
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
cess, these components will only recognize keys
coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
tem during registration. Any key that is not given
to the dealer at the time of registration will no
longer be able to start your vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not allow the immobilizer system key,
which contains an electrical transponder,
to come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect system function.
When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors cannot be opened
using the inside or outside door handles. The
doors must be unlocked to open the doors.
WARNING
● Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
● To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadvertent
door lock activation, do not leave chil-
dren, people who require the assistance
of others or pets unattended in your
vehicle. Additionally, the temperature
inside a closed vehicle on a warm day
can quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury or
death to people and pets.
LOCKING WITH KEY
To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as
shown.
Manual (if so equipped)
To lock a door, turn the key toward the front of the
vehicle
䊊
1
. To unlock, turn the key toward the rear
䊊
2
.
Driver’s side
LPD0349
DOORS
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
Selective open (if so equipped)
The power door lock system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors at the same time.
Turning the key toward the front
䊊
1
of the vehicle
locks all doors.
Turning the key toward the rear
䊊
2
of the vehicle
unlocks that door. From that position, returning
the key to neutral
䊊
3
(where the key can only be
removed and inserted) and turning it toward the
rear again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors
䊊
4
.
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK
KNOB
To lock the door without the key, move the inside
lock knob to the lock position
䊊
1
, then close the
door.
To unlock the door without the key, move the
inside lock knob to the unlock position
䊊
2
.
If equipped, the door can also be opened without
a key by pulling the open lever.
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH (if so equipped)
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door
lock switch to the lock position
䊊
1
. When locking
the door this way, be certain not to leave the key
inside the vehicle.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch to the unlock position
䊊
2
.
LPD0483
Inside lock
SPA2760
WPD0381
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if so
equipped)
● All doors lock automatically when the vehicle
speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
● All doors unlock automatically when the ig-
nition is placed in the OFF position or when
the key is removed from the ignition switch.
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors
from being opened accidentally, especially when
small children are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on the
edge of the rear doors.
When the lever is in the unlock position
䊊
2
, the
door can be opened from the outside or the
inside.
When the lever is in the LOCK position
䊊
1
,
the door can be opened only from the out-
side.
WARNING
● Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufac-
turer for the possible influences before
use.
● The remote keyless entry key fob trans-
mits radio waves when the buttons are
pressed. The radio waves may affect
aircraft navigation and communication
systems. Do not operate the remote
keyless entry key fob while on an air-
plane. Make sure the buttons are not
operated unintentionally when the unit
is stored for a flight.
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn the
interior light on, and activate the panic alarm by
using the key fob from outside the vehicle.
Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle
before locking the doors.
The key fob can operate at a distance of approxi-
mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective
distance depends upon the conditions around
the vehicle.
SPA2037
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
As many as five key fobs can be used with one
vehicle. For information concerning the purchase
and use of additional key fobs, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
The key fob will not function when:
● the battery is discharged
● the distance between the vehicle and the
key fob is over 33 ft (10 m)
The panic alarm will not activate when the
key is in the ignition switch.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the key fob:
● Do not allow the key fob, which con-
tains electrical components, to come
into contact with water or salt water.
This could affect the system function.
● Do not drop the key fob.
● Do not strike the key fob sharply
against another object.
● Do not change or modify the key fob.
● Wetting may damage the key fob. If the
key fob gets wet, immediately wipe until
it is completely dry.
● Do not place the key fob for an ex-
tended period in an area where tem-
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).
● Do not attach the key fob with a key
holder that contains a magnet.
● Do not place the key fob near equip-
ment that produces a magnetic field,
such as a TV, audio equipment and per-
sonal computers.
If a key fob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-
ommends erasing the ID code of that key
fob. This will prevent the key fob from
unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle.
For information regarding the erasing
procedure, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer.
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM
Locking the doors
1. Remove the ignition key.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Press the LOCK
button on the key
fob.
● All the doors will lock.
● The hazard indicator flashes once.
LPD2039
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
NOTE:
An auto-relock function will operate after a
full or partial unlock, when no further user
action occurs. The relock will operate ap-
proximately 30 seconds after full or partial
unlock. The auto-relock function is can-
celed when any door is opened or the key is
inserted into the ignition.
Unlocking the doors
Press the UNLOCK button on the key fob.
● All doors unlock
● The hazard indicator flashes twice.
Auto relock
When the button on the key fob is
pressed, all doors will lock automatically within
30 seconds unless one of the following opera-
tions is performed:
● Any door is opened.
● A key is inserted into the ignition switch and
the switch is cycled from OFF to ON.
Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
by pressing and holding the
button on the
key fob for longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm will stay on for a period of time.
The panic alarm stops when:
● It has run for a period of time, or
● Any button is pressed on the key fob.
LPD2040 LPD2041
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
Using the interior light
Press the button on the key fob once to
turn on the interior lights.
For additional information, refer to “Interior light”
in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
1. Pull the hood lock release handle
䊊
1
located
below the instrument panel until the hood
springs up slightly.
2. Locate the lever
䊊
2
in between the hood and
grille and push the lever sideways with your
fingertips.
3. Raise the hood
䊊
3
.
4. Remove the support rod
䊊
4
and insert it into
the slot
䊊
5
.
Hold the coated parts
䊊
A
when removing or
resetting the support rod. Avoid direct con-
tact with the metal parts, as they may be
hot immediately after the engine has been
stopped.
When closing the hood, return the support rod to
its original position, lower the hood to approxi-
mately 30 cm (12 in) above the latch and release
it. This allows proper engagement of the hood
latch.
LPD2023
HOOD
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
WARNING
● Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving. Fail-
ure to do so could cause the hood to fly
open and result in an accident.
● If you see steam or smoke coming from
the engine compartment, to avoid injury
do not open the hood.
WARNING
The rear hatch must be closed securely
before driving. An open rear hatch could
allow dangerous exhaust gases to be
drawn inside the vehicle. For additional
information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon
monoxide)” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
OPENING THE REAR HATCH
To open the rear hatch, unlock it with one of the
following operations, then pull on the handle.
● Push the power door lock switch to the
unlock position.
● Unlock all doors using the key
䊊
A
(if so
equipped).
● Press the
button on the remote con-
trol once. For additional information, refer to
“Remote keyless entry system” in this sec-
tion.
LPD2155
REAR HATCH (Hatchback)
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
To close the rear hatch, push the rear hatch down
until it securely locks.
OPENER OPERATION
The fuel-filler door release is located below the
instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler door, pull
the release. To lock, close the fuel-filler door
securely.
FUEL-FILLER CAP
The fuel-filler cap is a detachable type. Turn the
cap counterclockwise
䊊
1
to remove. To tighten,
turn the cap clockwise
䊊
2
until a single click is
heard.
Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder while
refueling.
LPD2013 LPD2022 SPA1755
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
WARNING
● Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain condi-
tions. You could be burned or seriously
injured if it is misused or mishandled.
Always stop the engine and do not
smoke or allow open flames or sparks
near the vehicle when refueling.
● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling may
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel
spray and possibly a fire.
● Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a
built-in safety valve needed for proper
operation of the fuel system and emis-
sion control system. An incorrect cap
can result in a serious malfunction and
possible injury. It could also cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to
come on.
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to
attempt to start your vehicle.
● Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable fuel
containers:
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are fill-
ing it.
– Use only approved portable fuel con-
tainers for flammable liquid.
CAUTION
● Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your
vehicle. For additional information, re-
fer to “Fuel Recommendation” in the
“Technical and consumer information”
section of this manual.
● Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
properly may cause the
Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.
If the
light illuminates because
the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,
tighten or install the cap and continue
to drive the vehicle. The
light
should turn off after a few driving trips.
If the
light does not turn off after a
few driving trips, have the vehicle in-
spected. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
● The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning mes-
sage will be displayed/warning will ap-
pear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly
tightened. It may take a few driving trips
for the message to be displayed. Failure
to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly
after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning
message is displayed/warning appears
may cause the
Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL) to illuminate.
● For additional information, refer to the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and controls” section
of this manual.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
For additional information, refer to “Fuel Recom-
mendation” in the “Technical and consumer infor-
mation” section of this manual.
TILT OPERATION
Pull the lock lever down
䊊
1
and adjust the steer-
ing wheel up or down
䊊
2
to the desired position.
Push the lock lever up
䊊
1
to lock the steering
wheel in place.
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
1. To block glare from the front, swing down
the main sun visor
䊊
1
.
2. To block glare from the side, remove the sun
visor from the center mount and swing the
sun visor to the side
䊊
2
.
LPD0355
WPD0435
STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3. Slide
䊊
3
the extension sun visor (if so
equipped) in or out as needed.
CAUTION
Do not store the sun visor before returning
the extension to its original position.
VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor
down and flip open the mirror cover.
CARD HOLDER (driver’s side only)(if
so equipped)
To access the card holder, pull the sun visor
down and slide card in the card holder
䊊
A
. Do not
view information while operating the vehicle.
SPA2192 JVI0018X
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
REARVIEW MIRROR
The night position
䊊
1
reduces glare from the
headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
Use the day position
䊊
2
when driving in daylight
hours.
WARNING
Use the night position only when neces-
sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
WARNING
● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
You could lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.
Manual control type (if so equipped)
The outside mirror can be moved in any direction
for a better rear view by adjusting the inside lever.
WPD0126 LPD2168
MIRRORS
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Electric control type (if so equipped)
The outside mirror remote control will operate
only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
Move the small switch
䊊
1
to select the right or left
mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position
using the large switch
䊊
2
.
WARNING
● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
You could lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.
Manual folding outside mirrors
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.
Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
The outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,
defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Rear window and
outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch”
in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
LPD0237 WPD0056
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
MEMO
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
4 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone
systems
RearView Monitor (if so equipped)...................4-2
RearView Monitor system operation ..............4-3
How to read the displayed lines ..................4-3
Difference between predicted and actual
distances ......................................4-4
Adjusting the screen ............................4-6
RearView Monitor system limitations ..............4-6
System maintenance............................4-7
Vents ............................................4-8
Heater and Air Conditioner (manual) (Type A)
(if so equipped) ...................................4-8
Controls.......................................4-9
Heater operation ..............................4-10
Air conditioner operation (if so equipped) ........4-11
Air flow charts.................................4-12
Heater and Air Conditioner (manual) (Type B)
(if so equipped) ..................................4-16
Controls......................................4-17
Heater operation ..............................4-18
Air conditioner operation .......................4-19
Air flow charts.................................4-20
Servicing air conditioner (if so equipped) ............4-24
Audio system ....................................4-24
Radio ........................................4-24
FM radio reception ............................4-24
AM radio reception ............................4-25
Audio operation precautions ....................4-25
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player
(Type A) (if so equipped) .......................4-32
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player
(Type B) (if so equipped) .......................4-36
USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port
(if so equipped) ...............................4-41
iPod®* player operation (if so equipped) .........4-43
CD care and cleaning ..........................4-45
Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped) ...............................4-45
Antenna ......................................4-46
Car phone or CB radio ............................4-47
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
(if so equipped) ..................................4-47
Regulatory Information .........................4-49
Using the system ..............................4-49
Control
buttons ...............................4-51
Getting started ................................4-51
List of commands..............................4-52
Troubleshooting guide .........................4-57
WARNING
● Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the Rear-
View Monitor system could result in se-
rious injury or death.
● RearView Monitor is a convenience fea-
ture and is not a substitute for proper
backing. Always turn and look out the
windows and check mirrors to be sure
that it is safe to move before operating
the vehicle. Always back up slowly.
● The system is designed as an aid to the
driver in showing large stationary ob-
jects directly behind the vehicle, to help
avoid damaging the vehicle.
LHA3823
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)
4-2 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
● The distance guide line and the vehicle
width line should be used as a reference
only when the vehicle is on a level
paved surface. The distance viewed on
the monitor is for reference only and
may be different than the actual dis-
tance between the vehicle and dis-
played objects.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the
camera.
The RearView Monitor system automatically
shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift
lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position. The
radio can still be heard while the RearView Moni-
tor is active.
To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor
system uses a camera located just above the
vehicle’s license plate
䊊
1
.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position, move
the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position or press
the CAMERA button to operate the RearView
Monitor.
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width
and distances to objects with reference to the
vehicle body line
䊊
A
are displayed on the monitor.
Distance guide lines:
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
● Red line
䊊
1
: approx. 0.5 m (1.5 ft)
● Yellow line
䊊
2
: approx.1m(3ft)
● Green line
䊊
3
: approx.2m(7ft)
● Green line
䊊
4
: approx. 3 m (10 ft)
LHA3733 LHA2944
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3
Vehicle width guide lines
䊊
5
:
Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
PREDICTED AND ACTUAL
DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their locations on
the ground are for approximate reference only.
Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or project-
ing objects will be actually located at distances
different from those displayed in the monitor rela-
tive to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When
in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you
are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to
view the positioning of objects behind the ve-
hicle.
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-
tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown closer than the actual distance.
Note that any object on the hill is further than it
appears on the monitor.
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown farther than the actual distance.
Note that any object on the hill is closer than it
appears on the monitor.
LHA3751 LHA3752
4-4 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Backing up near a projecting object
The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the object in
the display. However, the vehicle may hit the
object if it projects over the actual backing up
course.
Backing up behind a projecting object
The position
䊊
C
is shown farther than the position
䊊
B
in the display. However, the position
䊊
C
is
actually at the same distance as the position
䊊
A
.
The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to
the position
䊊
A
if the object projects over the
actual backing up course.
LHA2946 LHA4303
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-5
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
The procedure for adjusting the display settings
of the screen differs depending on the type of
screen present on the vehicle.
1. Firmly apply the brake and place the shift
lever in R (reverse).
2. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
3. The screen will display the Brightness set-
tings.
4. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the
setting up or down.
5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button again to
display the Contrast settings.
6. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the
setting up or down.
7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button to com-
plete the adjustment.
NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings of
the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is
moving. Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
● The system cannot completely elimi-
nate blind spots and may not show ev-
ery object.
● Underneath the bumper and the corner
areas of the bumper cannot be viewed
on the RearView Monitor because of its
monitoring range limitation. The system
will not show small objects below the
bumper, and may not show objects
close to the bumper or on the ground.
● Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-
tor differ from actual distance because
a wide-angle lens is used.
● Objects in the RearView Monitor will
appear visually opposite compared to
when viewed in the rearview and out-
side mirrors.
● Use the displayed lines as a reference.
The lines are highly affected by the
number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle
position, road conditions and road
grade.
● Make sure that the rear hatch is se-
curely closed when backing up.
● Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is in-
stalled above the license plate.
LHA3639
4-6 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
● When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing wa-
ter condensation on the lens, a mal-
function, fire or an electric shock.
● Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-
sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-
function or cause damage resulting in a
fire or an electric shock.
The following are operating limitations and do not
represent a system malfunction:
● When the temperature is extremely high or
low, the screen may not clearly display ob-
jects.
● When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light
from the bumper.
● The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light.
● The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-
tor may differ somewhat from the actual
color of objects.
● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
dark environment.
● There may be a delay when switching be-
tween views.
● If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the cam-
era, RearView Monitor may not display ob-
jects clearly. Clean the camera.
● Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off
any wax with a clean cloth dampened with a
diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a
dry cloth.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
● Do not damage the camera as the moni-
tor screen may be adversely affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera
䊊
1
, the RearView Monitor may not display ob-
jects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a
cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.
LHA3733
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-7
Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by mov-
ing the vent slides
䊊
1
.
Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by open-
ing, closing or rotating.
WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
NOTE:
● Odors from inside and outside the vehicle
can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor
can enter the passenger compartment
through the vents.
Center vents
LHA2085
Side vents
SAA3126
VENTS HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual) (Type A) (if so equipped)
4-8 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
● When parking, set the heater and air condi-
tioner (if so equipped) controls to turn off air
recirculation to allow fresh air into the pas-
senger compartment. This should help re-
duce odors inside the vehicle.
1.
Rear window defroster switch
2.
Fan control dial
3. A/C (air conditioner) button (if so
equipped)
4. Temperature control dial
5. Air intake lever (Outside air circulation/
Air recirculation)
6. Air flow control dial
CONTROLS
Fan control dial
The fan control dial turns the fan on and off,
and controls fan speed.
Air flow control dial
The air flow control dial allows you to select the
air flow outlets.
— Air flows from center and side vents.
— Air flows from center and side vents
and the front and rear floor outlets.
— Air flows mainly from the front and
rear floor outlets.
LHA3553
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-9
— Air flows from defroster outlets and
the front and rear floor outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust
the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the
temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase
the temperature, turn the dial to the right.
Fresh air
Move the air intake lever to the position.
The air flow is drawn from outside the vehicle.
Air recirculation
Move the air intake lever to the position to
recirculate air inside the vehicle.
Use the
selection:
● when driving on a dusty road.
● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-
senger compartment.
● for maximum cooling when using the air con-
ditioner.
Air conditioner button (if so
equipped)
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to
the desired position and press the
button
to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light
comes on when the air conditioner is operating.
To turn off the air conditioner, press the
button again.
Rear window and outside mirror (if so
equipped) defroster switch
For additional information, refer to “Rear window
and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster
switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section
of this manual.
HEATER OPERATION
Heating
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot
outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost
outlets.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
posi-
tion for normal heating.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired
position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side and
center vents.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
posi-
tion.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired
position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
Defrosting or defogging
This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to
defrost/defog the windows.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
posi-
tion.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired
position.
4-10 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
5. Align left and right vents to direct air flow
toward the front side windows.
● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-
dows, turn the fan control dial to the maxi-
mum position and the temperature control
dial to the full hot position.
When the
or position is selected,
press the
button to turn on the air condi-
tioner for better performance. This will dehumidify
the air and help defog the windows.
Bi-level heating
This mode directs cooler air from the side and
center vents and warmer air from the floor outlets.
When the temperature control dial is moved to
the full hot or full cool position, the air between
the vents and the floor outlets is the same tem-
perature.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
posi-
tion.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired
position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
Heating and defogging
This mode heats the cabin and defogs the wind-
shield.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
posi-
tion.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired
position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
When the
or position is selected,
press the
button to turn on the air condi-
tioner for better performance. This will dehumidify
the air and help defog the windows.
Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield. This
improves heater operation.
AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION (if
so equipped)
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
desired position and press the
button to
activate the air conditioner. When the air condi-
tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions
are added to the heater operation.
The air conditioner cooling function oper-
ates only when the engine is running.
Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
posi-
tion.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired
position.
4. Press the
button. The indicator light
comes on.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-11
● For quick cooling when the outside tem-
perature is high, move the air intake lever to
the
position. Be sure to return to
the
position for normal cooling.
Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
posi-
tion.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired
position.
4. Press the
button. The indicator light
comes on.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows and
dehumidify the air.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
posi-
tion.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired
position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
Operating tips
● Keep the windows and moonroof closed
while the air conditioner is in operation.
● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 min-
utes with the windows open to vent hot air
from the passenger compartment. Then
close the windows. This allows the air con-
ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.
● The air conditioning system should be
operated for approximately 10 minutes
at least once a month. This helps pre-
vent damage to the system due to lack
of lubrication.
● A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air
is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
● If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates engine coolant tem-
perature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. For additional
information, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emer-
gency” section of this manual.
AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and dial
positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
cooling or defrosting. The air intake lever
should always be in the
position for
heating and defrosting.
4-12 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
LHA2642 LHA2643
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-13
LHA2644 LHA2645
4-14 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
LHA2434
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-15
WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
NOTE:
● Odors from inside and outside the vehicle
can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor
can enter the passenger compartment
through the vents.
● When parking, set the heater and air condi-
tioner controls to turn off air recirculation to
allow fresh air into the passenger compart-
ment. This should help reduce odors inside
the vehicle.
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual) (Type B) (if so equipped)
4-16 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
CONTROLS
1. Rear window and outside mirror (if so
equipped) defroster switch
2.
Fan speed control dial
3. A/C (air conditioner) button
4. Temperature control dial
5. Air intake lever (Air recirculation and Fresh
air)
6. Air flow control dial
Fan control dial
The fan control dial turns the fan on and off
and controls fan speed.
Air flow control dial
The air flow control dial allows you to select the
air flow outlets.
— Air flows from center and side vents.
— Air flows from center and side vents
and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets and
foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust
the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the
temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase
the temperature, turn the dial to the right.
Fresh air
Move the air intake lever to the position.
The air flow is drawn from outside the vehicle.
Air recirculation
Move the air intake lever to the position to
recirculate air inside the vehicle.
Use the
selection:
● when driving on a dusty road.
● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-
senger compartment.
● for maximum cooling when using the air con-
ditioner.
Air conditioner button
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
desired position and press the
button to
turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light
LHA3531
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-17
comes on when the air conditioner is operating.
To turn off the air conditioner, press the
button again.
The air conditioner cooling function oper-
ates only when the engine is running.
Rear window and outside mirror (if so
equipped) defroster switch
For additional information, refer to “Rear window
and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster
switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section
of this manual.
HEATER OPERATION
Heating
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot
outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost
outlets.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
posi-
tion for normal heating.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired
position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side and
center vents.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
posi-
tion.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired
position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
Defrosting or defogging
This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to
defrost/defog the windows.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
posi-
tion.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired
position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-
dows, turn the fan control dial to the maxi-
mum position and the temperature control
dial to the full hot position.
When the
or position is selected,
press the
button to turn on the air condi-
tioner for better performance. This will dehumidify
the air and help defog the windows.
Bi-level heating
This mode directs cooler air from the side and
center vents and warmer air from the floor outlets.
When the temperature control dial is moved to
the full hot or full cool position, the air between
the vents and the floor outlets is the same tem-
perature.
1. Move the air intake lever to
position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired
position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
4-18 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-
shield.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
posi-
tion.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired
position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
When the
or position is selected,
press the
button to turn on the air condi-
tioner for better performance. This will dehumidify
the air and help defog the windows.
Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield. This
improves heater operation.
AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to
the desired position, and press the
button
to activate the air conditioner. When the air con-
ditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying func-
tions are added to the heater operation.
The air conditioner cooling function oper-
ates only when the engine is running.
Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
posi-
tion.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired
position.
4. Press the
button. The indicator light
comes on.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
● For quick cooling when the outside tem-
perature is high, move the air intake lever to
the
position. Be sure to return to
the
position for normal cooling.
Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
posi-
tion.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired
position.
4. Press the
button. The indicator light
comes on.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows and
dehumidify the air.
1. Move the air intake lever to the
posi-
tion.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired
position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-19
Operating tips
● Keep the windows closed while the air con-
ditioner is in operation.
● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 min-
utes with the windows open to vent hot air
from the passenger compartment. Then,
close the windows. This allows the air con-
ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.
● The air conditioning system should be
operated for approximately 10 minutes
at least once a month. This helps pre-
vent damage to the system due to lack
of lubrication.
● A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air
is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
● If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates engine coolant tem-
perature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. For additional
information, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emer-
gency” section of this manual.
AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and dial
positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
cooling or defrosting. The air intake lever
should always be in the
position for
heating and defrosting.
4-20 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
LHA3039 LHA3040
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-21
LHA3041 LHA3042
4-22 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
LHA3043
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-23
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-
hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with
the environment in mind.
This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-
quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-
tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants
will cause severe damage to your air conditioner
system. For additional information, refer to “Air
conditioner system (if so equipped) refrigerant
and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
to service your “environmentally friendly” air con-
ditioning system.
WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid per-
sonal injury, any air conditioner service
should be done only by a NISSAN dealer.
RADIO
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the
(power) button /
PWR (button) to turn the radio on. If you listen to
the radio with the engine not running, the ignition
switch should be placed in the ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station signal
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-
ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-
ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality
normally are caused by these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle
may influence radio reception quality.
Radio reception
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-
dio reception. These circuits are designed to
extend reception range and to enhance the qual-
ity of that reception.
However, there are some general characteristics
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even
when the finest equipment is used. These char-
acteristics are completely normal in a given re-
ception area and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.
Reception conditions will constantly change be-
cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,
signal distance and interference from other ve-
hicles can work against ideal reception. De-
scribed below are some of the factors that can
affect your radio reception.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to come
from the audio system speakers. Storing the de-
vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-
nate the noise.
FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 40 –
48 km (25 – 30 mi) with monaural (single chan-
nel) FM having slightly more range than stereo
FM. External influences may sometimes interfere
with FM station reception even if the FM station is
within 40 km (25 mi). The strength of the FM
signal is directly related to the distance between
the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a
line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same
characteristics as light. For example, they will
reflect off objects.
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
and/or drift.
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER (if so
equipped)
AUDIO SYSTEM
4-24 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Static and flutter: During signal interference from
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position
(usually in conjunction with increased distance
from the station transmitter), static or flutter can
be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the
treble control to reduce treble response.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective
characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected
signals reach the receiver at the same time. The
signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-
mentary flutter or loss of sound.
AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can
bend around objects and skip along the ground.
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of
these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-
ject to interference as they travel from transmitter
to receiver.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
areas where no obstacles exist.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
Compact disc (CD) player
CAUTION
● Do not force a compact disc into the CD
insert slot. This could damage the CD
and/or CD changer/player.
● Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or CD
changer.
● Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
player at a time.
● Only use high quality 12 cm (4.7 in)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
● During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the hu-
midity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely.
● The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
● The CD player sometimes cannot func-
tion when the compartment tempera-
ture is extremely high. Decrease the
temperature before use.
LHA0099
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-25
● Do not expose the CD to direct sun-
light.
● CDs that are in poor condition or are
dirty, scratched or covered with finger-
prints may not work properly.
● The following CDs may not work prop-
erly:
● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
● Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunc-
tion:
● 8 cm (3.1 in) discs with an adapter
● CDs that are not round
● CDs with a paper label
● CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
Compact disc with MP3
Terms
● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well-known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the
file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with
virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3
compression removes the redundant and
irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the
human ear does not hear.
● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file are determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
conversion) per second.
● ID3 tag — The ID3 tag is the part of the
encoded MP3 file that contains information
about the digital music file such as song title,
artist, album title, encoding bit rate, track
time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is
displayed on the Album/Artist/Track title line
on the display.
4-26 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Playback order
Playback order of the CD with compressed files
(MP3) is as illustrated.
● The names of folders not containing MP3
files are not shown in the display.
● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“ROOT” is displayed.
● The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software;
therefore, the files might not play in the de-
sired order.
Playback order chart
WHA1090
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-27
Specification chart
Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW
Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
Supported
versions*
MP3
Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512
Text character number limitation 31 characters
Displayable character codes
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian),
05: (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)
*Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
4-28 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Troubleshooting guide
Symptom Cause and Countermeasure
Cannot play
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names
and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Poor sound quality
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Bit rate may be too low.
It takes a relatively long time
before the music starts
playing.
If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3 disc or if it is a multi disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.
Music cuts off or skips
The writing software and hardware combination might not match or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate
files
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
Moves immediately to the
next song when playing
When a non-MP3 file has been given an extension of “.MP3” or “.mp3” or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there will be approximately
5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
Songs do not play back in
the desired order
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-29
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
Connection Port (if so equipped)
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an acci-
dent or serious injury.
CAUTION
● Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port may
damage the port. Make sure that the
USB device is connected correctly into
the USB port.
● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device
out of the port. This could damage the
port and the cover.
● Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the port.
The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device.
USB devices should be purchased separately as
necessary.
This system cannot be used to format USB de-
vices. To format a USB device, use a personal
computer.
In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the front
seats plays only sound without images for regu-
latory reasons, even when the vehicle is parked.
This system supports various USB memory de-
vices, USB hard drives and iPod® players. Some
USB devices may not be supported by this sys-
tem.
● Partitioned USB devices may not play cor-
rectly.
● Some characters used in other languages
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear
properly in the display. Using English lan-
guage characters with a USB device is rec-
ommended.
General notes for USB use:
● For additional information, refer to your de-
vice manufacturer’s owner information re-
garding the proper use and care of the de-
vice.
Notes for iPod® use (if so equipped):
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
● Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause
a checkmark to be displayed on and off
(flickering). Always make sure that the
iPod® is connected properly.
● An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain
in fast forward or rewind mode if it is con-
nected during a seek operation. In this case,
please manually reset the iPod®.
● An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will con-
tinue to fast-forward or rewind if it is discon-
nected during a seek operation.
● An incorrect song title may appear when the
Play Mode is changed while using an iPod®
nano (2nd Generation).
● Audiobooks may not play in the same order
as they appear on an iPod®.
● Large video files cause slow responses in an
iPod®. The vehicle center display may mo-
mentarily black out, but will soon recover.
● If an iPod® automatically selects large video
files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle
center display may momentarily black out,
but will soon recover.
4-30 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
iPod®* player (if so equipped)
● Some characters used in other languages
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed
properly on the vehicle center screen. We
recommend using English or Spanish lan-
guage characters with an iPod®.
● Large video podcast files cause slow re-
sponses in the iPod®. The vehicle center
display may momentarily black out, but it will
soon recover.
● If the iPod® automatically selects large
video podcast files while in the shuffle mode,
the vehicle center display may momentarily
black out, but it will soon recover.
● Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause
a checkmark to be displayed on and off
(flickering). Always make sure that the
iPod® is connected properly.
● The iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will con-
tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is discon-
nected during a seek operation.
● An incorrect song title may appear when the
Play Mode is changed while using the iPod®
nano (2nd Generation).
● Audiobooks may not play in the same order
as they appear on the iPod®.
● The iPod® nano (1st Generation) may re-
main in fast forward or rewind mode if it is
connected during a seek operation. In this
case, please manually reset the iPod®.
● If you are using an iPod® (3rd Generation
with Dock connector), do not use very long
names for the song title, album name or artist
name to prevent the iPod® from resetting
itself.
● Be careful not to do the following, or the
cable could be damaged and a loss of func-
tion may occur:
● Bend the cable excessively (40 mm
[1.6 in] radius maximum).
● Twist the cable excessively (more than
180 degrees).
● Pull or drop the cable.
● Do not force the iPod® cable connector
into the device port.
● Close the center console lid on the cable
or connectors.
● Store objects with sharp edges in the
storage where the cable is stored.
● Spill liquids on the cable and connectors.
● Do not connect the cable to the iPod® if the
cable and/or connectors are wet. It may
damage the iPod®.
● If the cable and connectors are exposed to
water, allow the cable and/or connectors to
dry completely before connecting the cable
to the iPod® (wait 24 hours for it to dry).
● If the connector is exposed to fluids other
than water, evaporative residue may cause a
short between the connector pins. In this
case, replace the cable, otherwise damage
to the iPod® and a loss of function may
occur.
● If the cable is damaged (insulation cut, con-
nectors cracked, contamination such as liq-
uids, dust, dirt, etc., in the connectors), do
not use the cable and contact a NISSAN
dealer to replace the cable with a new one.
● When not in use for extended periods of
time, store the cable in a clean, dust-free
environment at room temperature and with-
out direct sun exposure.
● Do not use the cable for any other purposes
other than its intended use in the vehicle.
*iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-31
FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type A) (if so
equipped)
For additional information, refer to “Audio opera-
tion precautions” in this section.
1.
CD eject button
2. CD insert slot
3. SCAN button
4. DISP button
5. RPT/RDM button
6. TUNE/FOLDER knob / MENU button
7. AUX IN jack
8. AUX button
9. CD button
10. AM button
11. FM button
12. VOL (volume) control knob /
(power)
button
13. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
14. TRACK
button
15. SEEK
button
Audio main operation
VOL (volume) control knob / (power)
button
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, then press the
button. If you listen
to the radio with the engine not running, place the
ignition in the ACC position. The mode (radio or
CD) that was playing immediately before the
system was turned off resumes playing.
When a CD is loaded, the radio comes on. Press-
ing the
button again turns the system off.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to the right to
increase volume or to the left to decrease volume.
LHA8804
4-32 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
MENU button
Audio
Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.
Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Speed Sensitive Vol. Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to
“OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.
AUX IN Vol. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of 0 provides no additional boost in
volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.
Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the MENU button until the desired mode appears in the display. Press the SEEK or
TRACK
button to adjust the setting to the desired level (-5 to +5). Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level, press the MENU
button repeatedly until the radio or CD display reappears, otherwise the radio or CD display will automatically reappear after about 10 seconds.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-33
DISP (display) button
Press the DISP (display) button while a CD is
playing to change the text shown in the audio
display as follows:
For CDs:
Running Time → Album Title: → Artist Name: →
Song Title:
For MP3 CDs:
Running Time → Folder Title: → Album Title: →
Artist Name: → Song Title:
If the text information is too long to fully be dis-
played on the screen, press and hold the DISP
(display) button for longer than 1.5 seconds to
scroll through the rest of the text.
Press the DISP (display) button while the radio is
playing to toggle the audio display between sta-
tion number and RDS.
Clock operation
To turn the clock display on or off, press the
MENU button repeatedly until “Clock” appears
on the display. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to
toggle the setting (ON or OFF).
Clock set
1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until
“Adjust Clock: NO” appears on the display.
2. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to change to
“Adjust Clock: YES”.
3. Press the MENU button.
4. When “Change Hour” appears, turn the
TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust hours.
5. Press the MENU button.
6. When “Change Minute” appears, turn the
TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust minutes.
7. Press the MENU button to finish.
The display will return to the regular clock display
after 10 seconds if no further adjustment is per-
formed.
FM/AM radio operation
AM and FM buttons
Press the AM button to change the band to AM.
If another audio source is playing when the AM
button is pressed, the audio source playing will
automatically be turned off and the last radio
station played will begin playing.
Press the FM button to change the band as
follows:
FM1 → FM2 → FM1
If another audio source is playing when the FM
button is pressed, the audio source playing will
automatically be turned off and the last radio
station played will begin playing.
SEEK and TRACK (tuning)
buttons
Press the SEEK button
to tune from low to
high frequencies and stop at the next broadcast-
ing station.
Press the TRACK button
to tune from high
to low frequencies and stop at the next broad-
casting station.
Press and hold either button to seek at a faster
speed.
SCAN (tuning) button
Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in the
display window. Scan tuning begins from low to
high frequencies. Scan tuning stops for 5 sec-
onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi-
cient signal strength. When scanning, SCAN
blinks in the display. Pressing the SCAN button
again during this 5 second period stops scan
tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (six for
FM1, six for FM2) and six stations can be set for
the AM band.
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the AM or FM button.
4-34 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
2. Tune to the desired station using manual,
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
6) until a beep is heard.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
ner.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Compact disc (CD) player operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, and carefully insert the compact disc
into the slot with the label side up. The compact
disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts
to play.
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
CD button
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns
off and the last used compact disc starts to play.
SEEK and TRACK
(Fast Forward, Rewind)
buttons:
When the SEEK button
or TRACK
button
is pressed while the compact disc is
playing, the compact disc plays at an increased
speed while fast forwarding or rewinding. When
the button is released, the compact disc returns
to normal play speed.
SEEK and TRACK buttons
When the SEEK button
is pressed while
the compact disc is playing, the next track follow-
ing the present one starts to play from the begin-
ning. Press the SEEK button
several times
to skip several tracks. Each time the button is
pressed, the CD advances one additional track.
The track number appears in the display window.
(When the last track on the compact disc is
skipped, the first track is played.)
When the TRACK button
is pressed, the
track being played returns to the beginning.
Press the TRACK button
several times to
skip back several tracks. Each time the button is
pressed the CD moves back one track.
RPT (repeat)/RDM (random) button
Press the RPT/RDM button while a compact disc
is playing to change the play pattern as follows:
CD:
TRACK REPEAT → DISC RANDOM → DISC
REPEAT
MP3/WMA CD:
FOLDER REPEAT → TRACK REPEAT → DISC
RANDOM → FOLDER RANDOM → DISC RE-
PEAT
TRACK REPEAT: The track that is currently play-
ing will be repeated.
DISC RANDOM: The order of the tracks on the
disc will be mixed during play.
DISC REPEAT: The disc currently playing will be
repeated.
FOLDER REPEAT: The tracks in the current
folder will be repeated.
FOLDER RANDOM: The order of the tracks in
the folder will be mixed during play.
SCAN (CDs) button
Press the SCAN button for less than 1.5 seconds
to scan all tracks of the current disc for 10 sec-
onds per track. The SCAN icon is flashed during
scan mode.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-35
The scan mode is canceled once it scans through
all tracks on the disc, or if the SCAN button is
pressed during scan mode.
CD EJECT
When the
button is pressed with a com-
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected.
When the
button is pressed while the
compact disc is playing, the compact disc will
eject and the system will turn off.
AUX (Auxiliary) button
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The
AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard
analog audio input such as from a portable cas-
sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop com-
puters.
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device
when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.
Press the MENU button repeatedly until “AUX IN
Volume” appears on the screen to control the
incoming volume level of the auxiliary input de-
vice. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the
level between 0 and +3.
FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type B) (if so
equipped)
For additional information, refer to “Audio opera-
tion precautions” in this section.
1.
CD eject button
2. CD button
3. Display screen
4. CD insert slot
LHA3021
4-36 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
5. SEEK button
6. SCAN button
7.
TRACK button
8. BACK button
9. iPod MENU button
10. TUNE/FOLDER knob, ENTER/SETTING
button
11. AUX IN jack
12. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
13. RDM button
14. RPT button
15. VOL (volume) control knob / PWR (power)
button
16. DISP button
17. AUX button
18. FM•AM button
Audio main operation
VOL (volume) control knob / PWR (power)
button
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the PWR (power) button
while the system is off to call up the mode that
was playing immediately before the system was
turned off.
To turn the system off, press the PWR button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the
volume.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-37
ENTER/SETTING button
Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show the
Settings screen on the display. Turn the
TUNE/FOLDER knob to navigate the options and
then press the ENTER/SETTING button to make
a selection.
Audio
Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.
Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of
the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume in-
creases in relation to vehicle speed.
AUX Vol. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of 0 provides
no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.
Brightness and Contrast Adjust the brightness or contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.
Clock adjust Press the ENTER/SETTING button to highlight the hours or minutes and then use the TUNE/FOLDER knob to
adjust the value. Press the ENTER/SETTING button again to set the value.
On-Screen Clock Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.
RDS Display Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.
iPod Menu Language Select the desired language for the system from the available options.
Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/FOLDER control knob to select the item
to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING button until the display returns to
the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.
4-38 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
iPod MENU button
This button can only be used for iPod® opera-
tions. For additional information, refer to “iPod®
player operation” in this section.
DISP (display) button
The DISP (display) button turns the display
screen on or off.
BACK button
Press the BACK button to return to the previous
menu screen.
FM/AM radio operation
FM·AM button
Press the FM·AM button to change the band as
follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play-
ing will automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will begin playing.
TUNE/FOLDER knob (Tuning)
Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to the left or right
for manual tuning.
SEEK tuning
Press the SEEK button
or to tune
from low to high or high to low frequencies and to
stop at the next broadcasting station.
SCAN tuning
Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-
casting station for 5 seconds. SCAN will appear
on the screen while the radio is scan tuning.
Pressing the button again during this 5 second
period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will
remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is
not pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning
moves to the next station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve
stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6
for FM2).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual,
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
6) until the preset number is updated on the
display and a beep sound is heard.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
ner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Compact disc (CD) player operation
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
CD/MP3 display mode
While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain text
may be displayed on the screen if the CD has
been encoded with text information. Depending
on how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, informa-
tion such as Artist, Song and Folder will be dis-
played.
The track number and the total number of tracks
in the current folder or on the current disc are
displayed on the screen as well.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-39
SEEK/TRACK (Reverse or
Fast Forward) button
Press and hold the SEEK/TRACK button
or for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc
is playing to reverse or fast forward the track
being played. The compact disc plays at an in-
creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding.
When the button is released, the compact disc
returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/TRACK button
Press the SEEK/TRACK button
while a
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press the
SEEK/TRACK button
several times to skip
backward several tracks.
Press the SEEK/TRACK button
while a
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one
track. Press the SEEK/TRACK button
sev-
eral times to skip forward several tracks. If the last
track on a CD is skipped, the first track on the
disc is played. If the last track in a folder of an
MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first track of the
next folder is played.
TUNE/FOLDER knob, ENTER/SETTING
button (MP3/WMA CD only)
If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is play-
ing, turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to change
folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back a
folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a
folder.
RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT button is pressed while a com-
pact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
CD:
1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re-
peated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be re-
peated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-
cator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on
the screen unless no pattern is applied.
RDM (random) button
When the RDM button is pressed while a com-
pact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
CD:
1 Disc Random ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Disc Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF
1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be
played randomly.
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder
will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on
the screen unless no pattern is applied.
AUX button
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The
AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard
analog audio input such as from a portable cas-
sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop
computer.
4-40 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device
plugged into the AUX IN jack. The AUX button is
also used to switch the audio system to a source
plugged into the USB connection port in the
center console. When a device is plugged into
the AUX IN jack while another device is plugged
into the USB connection port, the AUX button is
used to toggle between the two functions.
For additional information about the USB con-
nection port, refer to “USB (Universal Serial Bus)
connection port” in this section.
EJECT button
When the
button is pressed with a com-
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and
the last source will be played.
Additional features
For additional information about the iPod® player
available with this system, refer to “iPod® player
operation” in this section.
For additional information about the USB (Uni-
versal Serial Bus) connection port available with
this system, refer to “USB (Universal Serial Bus)
connection port” in this section.
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
CONNECTION PORT (if so equipped)
Connecting a device to the USB
connection port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an acci-
dent or serious injury.
CAUTION
● To avoid damage and loss of function
when using a USB device, note the fol-
lowing precautions.
● Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port may
damage the port. Make sure that the
USB device is connected correctly into
the USB port.
● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device
out of the port. This could damage the
port and the cover.
● Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the port.
For additional information, refer to your device
manufacturer’s owner information regarding the
proper use and care of the device.
The USB port is located in the center console.
Insert the USB device into the connection port.
When a compatible storage device is plugged
into the connection port, compatible audio files
on the storage device can be played through the
vehicle’s audio system.
LHA3037
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-41
Audio file operation
AUX button
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the AUX button to switch to
the USB input mode.
Play information
Information about the audio files being played
can be displayed on the display screen of the
vehicle’s audio system. Depending on how the
audio files are encoded, information such as
Folder, Song and Artist will be displayed.
The track number and number of total tracks in
the folder are displayed on the screen as well.
SEEK/TRACK (Reverse or
Fast Forward) buttons
Press and hold the SEEK/TRACK buttons
or for 1.5 seconds while an audio file on
the USB device is playing to reverse or fast
forward the track being played. The track plays at
an increased speed while reversing or fast for-
warding. When the button is released, the audio
file returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/TRACK buttons
Press the SEEK/TRACK button
while an
audio file on the USB device is playing to return to
the beginning of the current track. Press the
SEEK/TRACK button
several times to skip
backward several tracks.
Press the SEEK/TRACK button
while an
audio file on the USB device is playing to ad-
vance one track. Press the SEEK/TRACK
button
several times to skip forward sev-
eral tracks. If the last track in a folder on the USB
device is skipped, the first track of the next folder
is played.
RDM (random) button
When the RDM button is pressed while an audio
file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
All Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF
All Random: all tracks on the USB device will be
played randomly.
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder
will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the USB device is
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT button is pressed while an audio
file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re-
peated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be re-
peated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-
cator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the USB device is
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
TUNE/FOLDER knob, ENTER/SETTING
button
If there are multiple folders with audio files on the
USB device, turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to
change folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip
back a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip
ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audio
files on the USB device, turning the
TUNE/FOLDER knob in either direction will re-
turn to the first track on the USB device.
4-42 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION (if so
equipped)
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an acci-
dent or serious injury.
CAUTION
● Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port may
damage the port. Make sure that the
USB device is connected correctly into
the USB port.
● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device
out of the port. This could damage the
port and the cover.
● Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the port.
For additional information, refer to your device
manufacturer’s owner information regarding the
proper use and care of the device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the
iPod® can be controlled with the audio system
controls and display screen, use the USB port
located in the center console. Connect the
iPod®-specific end of the cable to the iPod®
and the USB end of the cable to the USB con-
nection port on the vehicle. If your iPod® sup-
ports charging via a USB connection, its battery
will be charged while connected to the vehicle
with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi-
tion.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can
only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, re-
move the USB end of the cable from the USB
connection port on the vehicle, then remove the
cable from the iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
● iPod® Classic - 1st through 6th generation
● iPod® Mini - 1st and 2nd generation
● iPod® Nano - 1st through 3rd generation
● iPod® Touch - 1st generation
● iPhone® - 1st generation
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to
the version indicated above.
Audio main operation
iPod MENU button
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the iPod MENU button to
switch to the iPod® mode.
LHA3037
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-43
If another audio source is playing and the iPod®
is connected, press the iPod MENU button to
switch to the iPod® mode.
If the system is turned off while the iPod® is
playing, the iPod® will start when the PWR but-
ton is pressed.
Top menu item selecting
Press the iPod MENU button while the iPod® is
connected to show the interface for iPod® op-
eration on the audio display. The items can be
chosen from the menu list screen by pressing the
SEEK button
or while the iPod® is
operational. The display pattern can be changed
as follows:
Playlists → Artists → Albums → Songs → Pod-
casts → Genres → Composers → Audiobooks
For additional information, refer to the iPod®
owner’s manual.
ENTER/SETTING and BACK buttons
Press the ENTER/SETTING button while the top
menu is displayed to show program details on the
audio display. Use the SEEK buttons
or to scroll through the choices and press
the ENTER button to make a selection. Press the
BACK button to return to the previous display.
TUNE/FOLDER knob
If there are multiple folders with audio files on the
iPod® device, turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to
change folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip
back a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip
ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audio
files on the iPod® device, turning the
TUNE/FOLDER knob in either direction will re-
turn to the first track on the iPod® device.
SEEK/TRACK buttons
When the
SEEK button or TRACK
button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds while
the iPod® is playing, the next track or the begin-
ning of the current track on the iPod® will be
played.
When the
SEEK button or TRACK
button is pressed for more than 1.5 seconds
while the iPod® is playing, the iPod® will play
while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the
button is released, the iPod® will return to the
normal play speed.
RDM/RPT button
Press the RDM/RPT button while a track is play-
ing to change the play pattern as follows:
Excluding Podcast and Audiobook:
1 TRACK REPEAT→ ALL REPEAT→ OFF
TRACK SHUFFLE→ ALBUM SHUFFLE → OFF
For additional information, refer to the iPod®
owner’s manual.
4-44 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
CD CARE AND CLEANING
● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the
disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.
● Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.
● Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.
● A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)
The audio system can be operated using the
controls on the steering wheel.
1.
Tuning switch
2. SOURCE switch
3. Volume control switches
SOURCE switch
With the ignition switch placed in the ACC or ON
position, push the SOURCE switch to turn the
audio system on.
LHA0049 LHA8800
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-45
Push the SOURCE switch to change the mode in
the following sequence: AM → FM → CD →
iPod® →AUX.
If no CD is loaded or AUX and/or iPod® are not
connected, the CD, AUX and or iPod® modes
will be skipped.
Volume control switches
Push the volume control switch to increase or
decrease the volume.
Tuning switch
Memory change (radio):
Push the tuning switch for less than 1.5 seconds
to change to the next or previous radio preset.
SEEK tuning (radio):
Push the tuning switch for more than 1.5 sec-
onds to seek the next or previous radio station.
FF, REW (CD and iPod®):
Push the tuning switch for less than 1.5 seconds
to return to the beginning of the present program
or skip to the next program. Push several times to
skip back or skip through programs.
Folder change (CD with MP3 or WMA):
Push the tuning switch for more than 1.5 sec-
onds to change the folders (if there are any
folders).
ANTENNA
The antenna can be folded down toward the rear
of the vehicle
䊊
1
.
The antenna cannot be shortened but can be
folded down or removed. When you need to
remove the antenna, turn the antenna rod coun-
terclockwise
䊊
B
.
To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna rod
clockwise
䊊
A
and hand tighten.
CAUTION
● Always properly tighten the antenna
rod during installation or the antenna
rod may break during vehicle operation.
● Be sure that the antenna is removed
before the vehicle enters an automatic
car wash.
● Be sure to fold down the antenna be-
fore the vehicle enters a garage with a
low ceiling.
LHA2073
4-46 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in
your vehicle, be sure to observe the following
precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may
adversely affect the engine control system and
other electronic parts.
WARNING
● A cellular phone should not be used for
any purpose while driving so full atten-
tion may be given to vehicle operation.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of
cellular phones while driving.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-
sible from the electronic control
modules.
● Keep the antenna wire more than 20 cm
(8 in) away from the electronic control
system harnesses. Do not route the an-
tenna wire next to any harness.
● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
as recommended by the manufacturer.
● Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
● For additional information, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-47
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-
patible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you
can set up the wireless connection between your
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can
make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to the
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-
necting procedure is required. Your phone is
automatically connected with the in-vehicle
phone module when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position with the previously connected
cellular phone turned on and carried in the ve-
hicle.
You can connect up to five different Bluetooth®
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
● Set up the wireless connection between a
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module before using the hands-free
phone system.
● Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone module.
● You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-
vice area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal; such
as in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a moun-
tainous area.
LHA3820
4-48 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.
● When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-
ing a call.
● Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.
● While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
battery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.
● Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers. Stor-
ing the device in a different location may
reduce or eliminate the noise.
● Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone module. Please visit
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-
mended phone list and connecting.
● For additional information, refer to the cellu-
lar phone Owner’s Manual regarding the
telephone charges, cellular phone antenna
and body, etc.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
tions.
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions:
1. This device may not cause interference and
2. this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-
quirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Regulations.
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to
Visteon.
USING THE SYSTEM
The system allows hands-free operation of the
Bluetooth® Phone System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
not be available so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
which takes a few seconds. If the
button is
pressed before the initialization completes, the
system will announce “Hands-free phone system
not ready” and will not react to voice commands.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-49
Giving voice commands
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
and release the
button located on the
steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a
command.
The command given is picked up by the micro-
phone, and voice feedback is given when the
command is accepted.
● If you need to hear the available commands
for the current menu again, say “Help” and
the system will repeat them.
● If a command is not recognized, the system
announces, “Command not recognized.
Please try again.” Make sure the command is
said exactly as prompted by the system and
repeat the command in a clear voice.
● If you want to go back to the previous com-
mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-
tion” any time the system is waiting for a
response.
● You can cancel a command when the sys-
tem is waiting for a response by saying,
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces
“Cancel” and ends the Voice Recognition
session. You can also press and hold
the
button on the steering wheel for
5 seconds at any time to end the Voice
Recognition session. Whenever the Voice
Recognition session is canceled, a double
beep is played to indicate you have exited
the system.
● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, push the volume control switches
(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being
provided with feedback. You can also use
the radio volume control knob.
Voice Prompt Interrupt
In most cases you can interrupt the voice feed-
back to speak the next command by pressing
the
button on the steering wheel. After
interrupting the system, wait for a beep before
speaking your command.
One Shot Call
To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example, press
the
button and after the tone say, “Call
Redial”.
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the system,
observe the following:
● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing voice commands correctly.
4-50 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System are located on the steering
wheel.
PHONE/SEND
Press the
button to answer
an incoming call.
You can also use the
button
to interrupt the system feedback
and give a command at once. For
additional information, refer to
“List of commands” and “During a
call” in this section for additional
information.
PHONE/END
Press the
button to end a
call.
TUNING SWITCH
Push the tuning switch left or right
to manually control the phone
system.
GETTING STARTED
The following procedures will help you get
started using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System.
Choosing a language
To change the language, perform the following.
1. Press and hold the
button for more
than 5 seconds.
2. Press the
button.
3. The system announces the current language
and gives you the option to change the lan-
guage. To select the current language, press
the PHONE/SEND (
) button. To se-
lect a different language, push the tuning
switch (
or ) left or right.
NOTE:
You must press the
button within
5 seconds to change the language.
4. If you decide not to change the language, do
not press either button. After 5 seconds, the
session will end, and the language will not
be changed.
Connecting procedure
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be per-
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the
vehicle starts moving during the procedure,
the procedure will be canceled.
1. Press the
button on the steering
wheel. The system announces the available
commands.
LHA2087
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-51
2. Press the button again to connect
phone. If phone is already connected push
the tuning switch (
or ) to find
the desired command.
3. The system acknowledges the command
and announces the next set of available
commands. Then asks you to initiate con-
necting from the phone handset.
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. For additional information, re-
fer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for
details.
When prompted for a Passkey code, enter
“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code
“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and
cannot be changed.
Making a call by entering a phone
number
Main Menu
“Call”
䊊
A
“Phone Number”
䊊
B
Speak the digits
䊊
C
“Dial”
䊊
D
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel. A tone will sound.
2. Say: “Call”
䊊
A
. The system acknowledges
the command and announces the next set of
available commands.
3. Say “Phone Number”
䊊
B
. The system ac-
knowledges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.
Say: “Special Number” to dial more than 10
digits or any special characters.
4. Say the number you wish to call starting with
the area code in single digit format
䊊
C
.Ifthe
system has trouble recognizing the correct
phone number, try entering the number in
the following groups: 3-digit area code,
3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-
ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five
five five” as the 1st group, then “one two
one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five
four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than
10 digits or any special characters, say
“Special Number”.
5. When you have finished speaking the phone
number, the system repeats it back and an-
nounces the available commands.
6. Say: “Dial”
䊊
D
. The system acknowledges
the command and makes the call.
For additional information, refer to “List of com-
mands” in this section.
Receiving a call
When you hear the ring tone, press the
button on the steering wheel.
Once the call has ended, press the
button
on the steering wheel.
NOTE:
If you do not wish to take the call when you
hear the ring tone, press the
button
on the steering wheel.
For additional information, refer to “List of com-
mands” in this section.
LIST OF COMMANDS
Main Menu
“Call”
“Phonebook”
“Recent Calls”
“Connect Phone”
“Help”
4-52 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
When you press and release the button on
the steering wheel, you can choose from the
commands on the Main Menu. The following
pages describe these commands and the com-
mands in each sub-menu. Use the steering wheel
switches to choose a command from the list.
To browse the menu options, push the tuning
switch on the steering wheel left or right. The
system will always speak the current menu op-
tion. To select the current menu option, press
the
button. To go back to the previous
menu, press the
button.
“Call”
Main Menu
“Call”
(Speak name)
䊊
A
“Phone Number”
(Speak Digits)
䊊
B
“Special Number”
䊊
C
“Redial”
䊊
D
“Call Back”
䊊
E
“Help”
(Speak name)
䊊
A
If you have stored entries in the phonebook, you
can dial a number associated with a name.
For additional information, refer to “Phonebook”
in this section.
When prompted by the system, say the name of
the phone book entry you wish to call. The system
acknowledges the name.
If there are multiple numbers associated with the
name, the system asks you to choose the correct
number.
Once you have confirmed the name and location,
the system begins the call.
(Speak Digits)
䊊
B
When prompted by the system, say the number
you wish to call. For additional information, refer
to “Making a call by entering a phone number” in
this section.
“Special Number”
䊊
C
For dialing more than 10 digits or any special
characters, say “Special Number”. When the
system acknowledges the command, the system
will prompt you to speak the number.
“Redial”
䊊
D
Use the Redial command to call the last number
that was dialed.
The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing.
If a redial number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to redial” and
ends the NISSAN Voice Recognition System
session.
“Call Back”
䊊
E
Use the Call Back command to dial the number of
the last incoming call within the vehicle.
The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing.
If a call back number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to call back” and
ends the NISSAN Voice Recognition System
session.
During a call
During a call there are several command options
available. Press the
button on the steering
wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-
mands.
● “Help” — The system announces the avail-
able commands.
● “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces
“Cancel,” ends the Voice Recognition ses-
sion and returns to the call.
● “Send” — Use the Send command to enter
numbers, “*” or “#” during a call. For ex-
ample, if you were directed to dial an exten-
sion by an automated system:
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-53
Say: “Send one two three four.”
The system acknowledges the command
and sends the tones associated with the
numbers. The system then ends the Voice
Recognition session and returns to the call.
Say “star” for “*”, Say “pound” for “#”.
● “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-
mand to transfer the call from the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System to
the cellular phone when privacy is desired.
The system announces, “Transfer call. Call
transferred to privacy mode.” The system
then ends the Voice Recognition session.
To reconnect the call from the cellular phone
to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free System,
press the
button.
● “Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute
your voice so the other party cannot hear it.
Use the mute command again to unmute
your voice.
NOTE:
If a call is ended or the cellular phone
network connection is lost while the Mute
feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset
to “off” for the next call so the other party
can hear your voice.
“Phonebook” (phones without
automatic phonebook download
function)
NOTE:
The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-
able when the vehicle is moving.
Main Menu
“Phonebook”
“List Names”
䊊
A
“Delete Entry”
䊊
B
“Transfer Entry”
䊊
C
For phones that do not support automatic down-
load of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth® pro-
file), the “Phonebook” command is used to manu-
ally add entries to the vehicle phonebook.
The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each
phone connected to the system.
NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phone-
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-
book if you are currently connected with
Phone B.
“List Names”
䊊
A
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names in the phonebook.
The system recites the phonebook entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
system goes back to the main menu.
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
by pressing the
button on the steering
wheel. The system ends the session.
“Delete Entry”
䊊
B
Use the Delete Entry command to erase one
entry from the phonebook. After the system rec-
ognizes the command, speak the name to delete
or say “List Names” to choose an entry.
“Transfer Entry”
䊊
C
Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new
name in the system.
When prompted by the system, say the name you
would like to give the new entry.
For example, say: “Mary.”
If the name is too long or too short, the system
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name
already stored, the system tells you, then prompts
you for a name again.
4-54 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
The system will ask you to transfer a phone
number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory:
Select “Transfer entry.” The system acknowl-
edges the command and asks you to initiate the
transfer from the phone handset. The new con-
tact phone number will be transferred from the
cellular phone via the Bluetooth® communica-
tion link.
The transfer procedure varies according to each
cellular phone. For additional information, refer to
the cellular phone Owner’s Manual.
The system repeats the number and prompts you
for the next command. When you have finished
entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose
“Store.”
The system confirms the name, location and
number.
“Phonebook” (phones with automatic
phonebook download function)
NOTE:
The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-
able when the vehicle is moving.
Main Menu
“Phonebook”
SayaName
“List Names”
䊊
A
“Help”
For phones that support automatic download of
the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth® profile), the
“Phonebook” command is used to manage en-
tries in the vehicle phonebook. You can say the
name of an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of
that entry.
The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for
each phone connected to the system.
When a phone is connected to the system, the
phonebook is automatically downloaded to the
vehicle. This feature allows you to access your
phonebook from the Bluetooth® system and call
contacts by name. You can record a custom
voice tag for contact names that the system has
difficulty recognizing.
NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phone-
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-
book if you are currently connected with
Phone B.
“List Names”
䊊
A
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names and locations in the phone book.
The system recites the phone book entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
system goes back to the main menu.
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
by pressing the
button on the steering
wheel. The system ends the session.
“Recent Calls”
Main Menu
“Recent Calls”
“Incoming”
䊊
A
“Missed”
䊊
B
“Outgoing”
䊊
C
“Redial”
䊊
D
“Call Back”
䊊
E
“Help”
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-55
Use the Recent Calls command to access out-
going, incoming or missed calls or dial numbers
for the last incoming or outgoing calls.
“Incoming”
䊊
A
Use the Incoming command to list the incoming
calls made to the vehicle.
“Missed”
䊊
B
Use the Missed command to list the calls made to
the vehicle that were not answered.
“Outgoing”
䊊
C
Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing
calls made from the vehicle.
“Redial”
䊊
D
Use the Redial command to dial the number of
the last outgoing call from the vehicle.
“Call Back”
䊊
E
Use the Call Back command to dial the number of
the last incoming call to the vehicle.
“Connect Phone”
NOTE:
The Add Phone command is not available
when the vehicle is moving.
Main Menu
“Connect Phone”
“Add Phone”
䊊
A
“Replace Phone”
䊊
B
“Select Phone”
䊊
C
“No”
“Help”
Use the Connect Phone commands to manage
the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable
the Bluetooth® function on the vehicle.
“Add Phone”
䊊
A
Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to
the vehicle. For additional information, refer to
“Connecting procedure” in this section.
“Replace Phone”
䊊
B
Use the Replace Phone command to replace an
existing phone pairing with a new phone. The
system will keep all voice tags assigned to your
phonebook.
“Select Phone”
䊊
C
Use the Select Phone command to select from a
list of phones connected to the vehicle. The sys-
tem will list the names assigned to each phone
and then prompt you for the phone you wish to
select. Only one phone can be active at a time.
4-56 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-
countered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try
each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until
the problem is resolved.
Symptom Solution
System fails to interpret the command correctly.
1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “List of commands” in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the
phone book.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by
using the “List Names” command. For additional information, refer to “Phonebook” in this section.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-57
MEMO
4-58 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving................5-2
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..................5-2
Three-way catalyst..............................5-2
Avoiding collision and rollover. . ..................5-3
Off-road recovery...............................5-3
Rapid air pressure loss ..........................5-4
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving................5-4
Ignition switch.....................................5-5
Automatic transmission (if so equipped)...........5-5
Manual transmission (if so equipped) .............5-6
Ignition switch positions .........................5-6
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System..............5-7
Before starting the engine ..........................5-7
Starting the engine ................................5-7
Driving the vehicle .................................5-8
Automatic transmission (if so equipped)...........5-8
Manual transmission (if so equipped) ............5-13
Parking brake ....................................5-14
Cruise control (if so equipped) .....................5-15
Precautions on cruise control . . .................5-15
Cruise control operations.......................5-16
Break-in schedule ................................5-17
Fuel efficient driving tips...........................5-17
Increasing fuel economy...........................5-18
Parking/parking on hills............................5-19
Power steering ...................................5-20
Brake system ....................................5-21
Brake precautions .............................5-21
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).................5-22
Brake assist ..................................5-23
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .............5-23
Brake force distribution ........................5-24
Cold weather driving..............................5-25
Freeing a frozen door lock ......................5-25
Antifreeze.....................................5-25
Battery .......................................5-25
Draining of coolant water .......................5-25
Tire equipment ................................5-26
Special winter equipment.......................5-26
Driving on snow or ice .........................5-26
Engine
block heater (if so equipped).............5-26
WARNING
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
● Properly secure all cargo to help pre-
vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seatbacks.
In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured
cargo could cause personal injury.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-
ous. It can cause unconsciousness or
death.
● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all win-
dows fully open, and have the vehicle
inspected immediately.
● Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
● Do not park the vehicle with the engine
running for any extended length of time.
● Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,
doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)
closed while driving, otherwise exhaust
gases could be drawn into the passen-
ger compartment. If you must drive with
one of these open, follow these
precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
2. Turn the air recirculation mode off
and set the fan speed control to the
highest level to circulate the air.
● The exhaust system and body should be
inspected by a qualified mechanic
whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering into the passenger
compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system, un-
derbody, or rear of the vehicle.
THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
WARNING
● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-
tem are very hot. Keep people, animals
or flammable materials away from the
exhaust system components.
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
● When parking, ensure that people or
inflammable materials are kept away
from the exhaust pipe.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
5-2 Starting and driving
CAUTION
● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously re-
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to
help reduce exhaust pollutants.
● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause overrich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-
ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-
able loss of performance or other un-
usual operating conditions are
detected. Have the vehicle inspected
promptly. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause
the engine to misfire, damaging the
three-way catalyst.
● Do not race the engine while warming it
up.
● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start
the engine.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss of
control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,
high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-
neuvers, because these driving practices could
cause you to lose control of your vehicle.
As with any vehicle, loss of control could
result in a collision with other vehicles or
objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,
particularly if the loss of control causes the
vehicle to slide sideways.
Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when
tired. Never drive when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-
the-counter drugs which may cause drowsi-
ness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in
the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this manual, and also
instruct your passengers to do so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli-
sions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an
unbelted or improperly belted person is
significantly more likely to be injured or
killed than a person properly wearing a
seat belt.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side wheels
may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this
occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-
ing the procedure below. Please note that this
procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle
must be driven as appropriate based on the con-
ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-
hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed
is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-
hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle
speed is reduced.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the
steering wheel until both tires return to the
Starting and driving 5-3
road surface. When all tires are on the road
surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-
propriate driving lane.
● If you decide that it is not safe to return the
vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,
road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the
vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur
if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to
hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss
can also be caused by driving on under-inflated
tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling
and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway
speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-
ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect
the tires for wear and damage. For additional
information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. If a tire
rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out” while
driving, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-
ing the procedure below. Please note that this
procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle
must be driven as appropriate based on the con-
ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
WARNING
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.
Losing control of the vehicle may cause a
collision and result in personal injury.
● The vehicle generally moves or pulls in
the direction of the flat tire.
● Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
● Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal.
● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location
off the road and away from traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually
stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
contact a roadside emergency service to
change the tire. For additional information,
refer to “Changing a flat tire” in the “In case
of emergency” section of this manual.
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol
or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-
duces coordination, delays reaction time
and impairs judgement. Driving after
drinking alcohol increases the likelihood
of being involved in an accident injuring
yourself and others. Additionally, if you
are injured in an accident, alcohol can
increase the severity of the injury.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,
you must choose not to drive under the influence
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
injured or killed in alcohol-related collisions. Al-
though the local laws vary on what is considered
to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol
affects all people differently and most people
underestimate the effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! That is
true for drugs (over-the-counter, prescription)
and illegal drugs, too. Don’t drive if your ability to
operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol,
drugs, or some other physical condition.
5-4 Starting and driving
WARNING
● Never remove the ignition key or place
the ignition switch in the LOCK position
while driving. The steering wheel will
lock. This may cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle and could result in
serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)
The ignition lock is designed so the key cannot be
turned to the LOCK position and removed until
the shift lever is placed in the P (Park) position.
When removing the key from the ignition switch,
make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) posi-
tion.
If the shift lever is not returned to the P (Park)
position, the ignition switch cannot be moved to
the LOCK position.
To remove the key from the ignition switch:
1. Shift the shift lever to the P (Park) position
with the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion.
3. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
If the shift lever is shifted to the P (Park) position
after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
position or when the ignition switch cannot be
turned to the LOCK position, proceed as follows
to remove the key.
1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) posi-
tion.
2. Turn the ignition switch slightly toward the
ON position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion.
4. Remove the key.
The shift lever is designed so it cannot be moved
out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear
positions if the ignition switch is turned to the
OFF position
䊊
1
or if the key is removed from the
switch.
SSD0392
IGNITION SWITCH
Starting and driving 5-5
The shift lever can be moved if the ignition
switch is in the ON position and the foot
brake pedal is depressed.
There is an OFF position
䊊
1
between the
LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position
is indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)
The ignition switch includes a device that helps
prevent accidental removal of the key while driv-
ing.
The key can only be removed when the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position.
In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it
must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise
from the straight up position.
To lock the steering wheel, place the igni-
tion switch in the LOCK position. Remove
the key. To unlock the steering wheel, in-
sert the key and turn it gently while rotating
the steering wheel slightly right and left.
IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS
LOCK: Normal parking position (0)
OFF: (1)
The engine can be turned off without locking the
steering wheel.
ACC: (Accessories) (2)
This position activates electrical accessories
such as the radio when the engine is not running.
ON: Normal operating position (3)
This position turns on the ignition system and the
electrical accessories.
START: (4)
This position starts the engine. As soon as the
engine has started, release the key. It automati-
cally returns to the ON position.
WSD0052
5-6 Starting and driving
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of the
registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automatic payment device on the key
ring), restart the engine using the following pro-
cedure:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-
rate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.
● Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-
ant, brake and clutch fluid (if so equipped),
and windshield-washer fluid as frequently as
possible, or at least whenever you refuel.
● Check that all windows and lights are clean.
● Visually inspect tires for their appearance
and condition. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
● Lock all doors.
● Position seat and adjust head restraints.
● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to
do likewise.
● Check the operation of warning lights when
the key is turned to the ON position. For
additional information, refer to “Warning
lights, indicator lights and audible remind-
ers” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-
tion of this manual.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Automatic transmission:
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral). P (Park) is recommended.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of
the P (Park) position and into any of
the other gear positions if the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position or
if the key is removed from the ignition
switch.
The starter is designed not to operate if
the shift lever is in any of the driving
positions.
Manual transmission:
Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). Depress
the clutch pedal to the floor while cranking
the engine.
3. Crank the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal by placing the ignition
switch in the START position. Release the
key when the engine starts. If the engine
starts, but fails to run, repeat the above
procedure.
● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-
tremely cold weather or when restarting,
depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-
proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE
Starting and driving 5-7
and then crank the engine. Release the
key and the accelerator pedal when the
engine starts.
● If the engine is very hard to start because
it is flooded, depress the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After
cranking the engine, release the accel-
erator pedal. Crank the engine with your
foot off the accelerator pedal by plac-
ing the ignition in the START position.
Release the key when the engine starts. If
the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat
the above procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
not start, turn the key off and wait 10 sec-
onds before cranking again, otherwise the
starter could be damaged.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-
onds after starting. Do not race the engine
while warming it up. Drive at moderate
speed for a short distance first, especially in
cold weather.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic
accessories that consume battery power
when the engine is not running (phone char-
gers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be
charged to maintain battery health.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)
The Automatic Transmission (A/T) in your vehicle
is electronically controlled to produce maximum
power and smooth operation.
The recommended operating procedures for this
transmission are shown on the following pages.
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle
performance and driving enjoyment.
WARNING
● Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 2 or 1.
Always depress the brake pedal until
shifting is completed. Failure to do so
could cause you to lose control and
have an accident.
● The cold engine idle speed is high, so
use caution when shifting the transmis-
sion into a forward or reverse position
before the engine has warmed up.
● Avoid revving up the engine while the
vehicle is stopped. This could cause un-
expected vehicle movement.
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
5-8 Starting and driving
CAUTION
● Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-
versing. This could cause an accident or
damage the transmission.
● Except in an emergency, do not shift to
the N (Neutral) position while driving.
Coasting with the transmission in the N
(Neutral) position may cause serious
damage to the transmission.
● Start the engine in either the P (Park) or
N (Neutral) position. The engine will not
start in any other position. If it does,
have your vehicle checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
● Shift into the P (Park) position and ap-
ply the parking brake when at a stand-
still for longer than a short waiting
period.
● Keep the engine at idling speed while
shifting from the N (Neutral) position to
any driving position.
● To avoid possible damage to your ve-
hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by
depressing the accelerator pedal. The
foot brake pedal should be depressed
in this situation.
Starting the vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the
foot brake pedal before moving the shift
lever out of the P (Park) position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and
move the shift lever to a drive position.
3. Release the parking brake, the foot brake
pedal, and then gradually start the vehicle in
motion.
The automatic transmission is designed so
the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed
before shifting from P (Park) to any drive
position while the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of P
(Park) and into any of the other gear posi-
tions if the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the key is
removed.
CAUTION
● Depress the foot brake pedal - Shifting
the shift lever to D, R, 2 or 1 without
depressing the foot brake pedal causes
the vehicle to move slowly when the
engine is running. Make sure the foot
brake pedal is depressed fully and the
vehicle is stopped before shifting the
shift lever.
● Make sure of the shift lever position-
Make sure the shift lever is in the de-
sired position. D, 2 and 1 are used to
move forward and R to back up.
● Warm up the engine- Due to the higher
idle speeds when the engine is cold,
extra caution must be exercised when
shifting the shift lever into the driving
position immediately after starting the
engine.
Starting and driving 5-9
To move the shift lever:
Push the button
䊊
A
while depressing the
brake pedal.
Push the button
䊊
A
.
Just move the shift lever.
Shifting
WARNING
● Apply the parking brake if the shift lever
is in any position while the engine is not
running. Failure to do so could cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
away and result in serious personal in-
jury or property damage.
● If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position while the engine is
running and the brake pedal is de-
pressed, the stop lights may not work.
Malfunctioning stop lights could cause
an accident injuring yourself and
others.
After starting the engine, fully depress the foot
brake pedal, push the shift lever button and move
the shift lever out of the P (Park) position.
If the ignition switch is in the OFF or ACC posi-
tion for any reason while the shift lever is in any
position other than the P (Park) position, the
ignition switch cannot be turned to the LOCK
position.
If the ignition switch cannot be placed in the
LOCK position, perform the following steps:
1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is
stopped.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position
while depressing the foot brake pedal.
3. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion.
P (Park)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the
P (Park) position only when the vehicle is
completely stopped.
Use the P (Park) position when the vehicle is
parked or when starting the engine. Make sure
the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake
pedal must be depressed and the shift lever
button pushed in to move the shift lever
from N (Neutral) or any drive position to P
(Park). Apply the parking brake. When parking
on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then shift
the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
LSD2005
5-10 Starting and driving
R (Reverse)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the
R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle
is completely stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make
sure the vehicle is completely stopped before
selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake
pedal must be depressed and the shift lever
button pushed in to move the shift lever
from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive po-
sition to R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The
engine can be started in this position. You may
shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine
while the vehicle is moving.
D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
2 (Second gear)
Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak-
ing on downhill grades.
1 (Low gear)
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly
or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or
mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep
downhill grades.
Do not shift into the gears when the vehicle
speed exceeds the following limits, otherwise the
engine may over-rev and cause engine damage.
Shift Lever position
12
50 km/h (31 mph) 95 km/h (59 mph)
Shift lock release
If the battery is discharged, the shift lever may not
be moved from the P (Park) position even with the
foot brake pedal depressed.
To move the shift lever, perform the following
procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the LOCK po-
sition and remove the key.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Remove the shift lock release cover using a
suitable tool.
LSD2006
Starting and driving 5-11
4. Push down the shift lock release using a
suitable tool.
5. Push the shift lever button
䊊
A
and move the
shift lever to the N (Neutral) position while
holding down the shift lock release.
6. Place the ignition switch in the ON position
to unlock the steering wheel.
7. Release the parking brake.
The vehicle may be moved to the desired loca-
tion.
Replace the removed shift lock release cover
after the operation.
If the shift lever cannot be moved out of the P
(Park) position, have the automatic transmission
system checked as soon as possible. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
Accelerator downshift
— in D (Drive) position —
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-
erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-
sion down into a lower gear, depending on the
vehicle speed.
Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation is activated, the
automatic transmission will be locked in third
gear.
If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-
ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning
and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe
system may be activated. This will occur
even if all electrical circuits are functioning
properly. In this case:
● Place the shift lever in the P (Park)
position.
● Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position and wait for 3 seconds.
● Then place the ignition switch back in
the ON position.
The vehicle should return to its normal op-
erating condition. If it does not return to its
normal operating condition, have the trans-
mission checked and repaired, if necessary.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch
Each time your vehicle is started, the transmis-
sion is automatically “reset” to overdrive ON.
ON: With the engine running and the
shift lever in the D (Drive) position,
the transmission upshifts into over-
drive as vehicle speed increases.
LSD2012
5-12 Starting and driving
Overdrive does not engage until the engine
has reached operating temperature.
OFF: For driving up and down long
slopes where engine braking is nec-
essary push the overdrive switch
once. The O/D OFF indicator light
in the instrument panel comes on at
this time.
When cruising at a low speed or climbing a
gentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable shift
shocks as the transmission shifts into and out of
overdrive repeatedly. In this case, depress the
overdrive switch to turn the overdrive off. The
O/D OFF indicator light in the instrument panel
comes on at this time.
When driving conditions change, depress the
overdrive switch to turn the overdrive on.
Remember not to drive at high speeds for ex-
tended periods of time with the overdrive off. This
reduces fuel economy.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)
WARNING
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
● Do not over-rev the engine when shift-
ing to a lower gear. This may cause a
loss of control or engine damage.
CAUTION
● Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
while driving. This may cause clutch
damage.
● Fully depress the clutch pedal before
shifting to help prevent transmission
damage.
● Stop your vehicle completely before
shifting into R (Reverse).
● When the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running (for example, at a stop
light), shift to N (Neutral) and release
the clutch pedal with the foot brake
applied.
● Do not shift to the N (Neutral) position
while driving. Doing so may result in an
accident due to loss of engine braking.
Shifting
To change gears, or when upshifting or down-
shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into
the appropriate gear, then release the clutch
slowly and smoothly.
To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress
the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever. If
the clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the
transmission is shifted, a gear noise may be
heard. Transmission damage could occur.
Start the vehicle in the 1 (1st) position and shift to
the 2 (2nd), 3 (3rd), 4 (4th) and 5 (5th) gear in
sequence according to the vehicle speed.
WSD0096
Starting and driving 5-13
You cannot shift directly from 5th gear into R
(Reverse). First shift into N (Neutral), then into R
(Reverse).
If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R
(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then
release the clutch pedal. Depress the clutch
pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st).
Suggested up-shift speeds
The following are suggested vehicle speeds for
shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions
relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.
Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road
conditions, the weather and individual driving
habits.
For normal acceleration in low altitude areas (less
than 1219 m [4,000 ft]):
GEAR CHANGE km/h (mph)
1st to 2nd 14 (9)
2nd to 3rd 19 (12)
3rd to 4th 34 (21)
4th to 5th 45 (28)
5th —
For quick acceleration in low altitude areas and
high altitude areas (over 1219 m [4,000 ft]):
Gear change km/h (mph)
1st to 2nd 24 (15)
2nd to 3rd 40 (25)
3rd to 4th 64 (40)
4th to 5th 72 (45)
5th —
Suggested maximum speed in each gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not
running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed
(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,
use the highest gear suggested for that speed.
Always observe posted speed limits, and drive
according to the road conditions, which will en-
sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine
when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause
engine damage or loss of vehicle control.
HR16DE engine model (5 M/T)
GEAR km/h (mph)
1st 43 (27)
2nd 79 (49)
3rd 116 (72)
4th 157 (97)
5th —
WARNING
● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-
leased before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
● Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
● Do not use the shift lever in place of the
parking brake. When parking, be sure
the parking brake is fully engaged.
● Do not leave children unattended in a
vehicle. They could release the parking
brake and cause an accident.
● To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave
children, people who require the assis-
tance of others or pets unattended in
your vehicle. Additionally, the tempera-
ture inside a closed vehicle on a warm
day can quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury or
death to people and pets.
PARKING BRAKE
5-14 Starting and driving
To engage: Pull the parking brake lever up
䊊
A
.
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Manual transmission models:
Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) posi-
tion.
Automatic transmission models:
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever
slightly, push the button
䊊
B
and lower the
lever completely .
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning
light goes out.
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
1. CANCEL switch
2. ACCEL/RES switch
3. COAST/SET switch
4. CRUISE ON/OFF switch
● If the cruise control system malfunctions, it
cancels automatically.
● To properly set the cruise control system,
use the following procedures.
WSD0048 LSD2462
CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)
Starting and driving 5-15
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving
under the following conditions:
● When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed.
● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in
speed.
● On winding or hilly roads.
● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
● In very windy areas.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-
tween 37 - 144 km/h (23 - 89 mph) without
keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
To turn on the cruise control, push the
ON/OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light in
the instrument panel comes on.
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to
the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch
and release it. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed.
● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-
celerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously
set speed.
● The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
when going up or down steep hills. If this
happens, drive without the cruise control.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods.
● Push the CANCEL switch.
● Tap the brake pedal.
● Push the ON/OFF switch. The CRUISE in-
dicator light in the instrument panel will go
out.
The cruise control is automatically canceled if:
● You depress the brake pedal while pushing
the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch.
The preset speed is deleted from memory.
● The vehicle slows down more than 13 km/h
(8 mph) below the set speed.
● You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of
the following three methods.
● Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
release the COAST/SET switch.
● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
When the vehicle attains the speed you de-
sire, release the switch.
● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed in-
creases by about 1.6 km/h (1 mph).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods.
● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-
hicle attains the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it.
● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-
lease the switch when the vehicle slows to
the desired speed.
● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed de-
creases by about 1.6 km/h (1 mph).
To resume the preset speed, push and re-
lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-
turns to the last set cruising speed when the
vehicle speed is over 37 km/h (23 mph).
5-16 Starting and driving
CAUTION
During the first 2,000 km (1,200 miles),
follow these recommendations to obtain
maximum engine performance and ensure
the future reliability and economy of your
new vehicle. Failure to follow these rec-
ommendations may result in shortened
engine life and reduced engine
performance.
● Avoid driving for long periods at constant
speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the
engine over 4,000 rpm.
● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
● Avoid quick starts.
● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving
Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy
from your vehicle.
1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake
Pedal Application
● Avoid rapid starts and stops.
● Use smooth, gentle accelerator and
brake application whenever possible.
● Maintain constant speed while commut-
ing and coast whenever possible.
2. Maintain Constant Speed
● Look ahead to try and anticipate and mini-
mize stops.
● Synchronizing your speed with traffic
lights allows you to reduce your number
of stops.
● Maintaining a steady speed can minimize
red light stops and improve fuel effi-
ciency.
3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher
Vehicle Speeds
● Below 64 km/h (40 mph), it is more effi-
cient to open windows to cool the vehicle
due to reduced engine load.
● Above 64 km/h (40 mph), it is more effi-
cient to use A/C to cool the vehicle due to
increased aerodynamic drag.
● Recirculating the cool air in the cabin
when the A/C is on reduces cooling load.
4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis-
tances
● Observing the speed limit and not ex-
ceeding 97 km/h (60 mph) (where legally
allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due
to reduced aerodynamic drag.
● Maintaining a safe following distance be-
hind other vehicles reduces unnecessary
braking.
● Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate
changes in speed permits reduced brak-
ing and smooth acceleration changes.
● Select a gear range suitable to road con-
ditions.
5. Use Cruise Control
● Using cruise control during highway driv-
ing helps maintain a steady speed.
● Cruise control is particularly effective in
providing fuel savings when driving on flat
terrains.
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
Starting and driving 5-17
6. Plan for the Shortest Route
● Utilize a map or navigation system to de-
termine the best route to save time.
7. Avoid Idling
● Shutting off your engine when safe for
stops exceeding 30–60 seconds saves
fuel and reduces emissions.
8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads
● Automated passes permit drivers to use
special lanes to maintain cruising speed
through the toll and avoid stopping and
starting.
9. Winter Warm Up
● Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel
economy.
● Vehicles typically need no more than
30 seconds of idling at start-up to effec-
tively circulate the engine oil before driv-
ing.
● Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating
temperature more quickly while driving
versus idling.
10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool
● Park your vehicle in a covered parking
area or in the shade whenever possible.
● When entering a hot vehicle, opening the
windows will help to reduce the inside
temperature faster, resulting in reduced
demand on your A/C system.
The following methods are recommended by
NISSAN to increase fuel economy on NISSAN
vehicles. All these recommendations can help
you to achieve a higher level of fuel economy in
your vehicle.
● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain
cruising speeds with a constant accelerator
position.
● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.
Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.
● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.
Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-
hicles.
● Use a proper gear range which suits road
conditions. On level roads, shift into high
gear as soon as possible.
● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
● Keep your engine tuned up.
● Follow the recommended scheduled main-
tenance.
● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-
sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
● Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-
proper alignment increases tire wear and
lowers fuel economy.
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
5-18 Starting and driving
● Air conditioner operation lowers fuel
economy. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
● When cruising at highway speeds, it is more
economical to use the air conditioner and
leave the windows closed to reduce drag.
● Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.
For additional information, refer to “Engine
oil and oil filter recommendations” in the
“Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
WARNING
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
● Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park) for
automatic transmission models or in an
appropriate gear for manual transmis-
sion models. Failure to do so could
cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly
or roll away and result in an accident.
Make sure the shift lever has been
pushed as far forward as it can go and
cannot be moved without depressing
the foot brake pedal.
● Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.
WSD0050
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
Starting and driving 5-19
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
● To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave
children, people who require the assis-
tance of others or pets unattended in
your vehicle. Additionally, the tempera-
ture inside a closed vehicle on a warm
day can quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury or
death to people and pets.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Manual transmission models:
Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) posi-
tion. When parking on an uphill grade, place
the shift lever in 1st gear.
Automatic transmission models:
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into
traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good
practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB
䊊
A
:
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the
vehicle forward until the curb side wheel
gently touches the curb.
● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB
䊊
B
:
Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
CURB
䊊
C
:
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road
so the vehicle will move away from the cen-
ter of the road if it moves.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position
and remove the key.
WARNING
● If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the steering will not work. Steering will
be harder to operate.
● When the power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running,
there will be no power assist for the
steering. You will still have control of
the vehicle but the steering will be
harder to operate. Have the power
steering system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
The power steering system is designed to pro-
vide power assist while driving to operate the
steering wheel with light force.
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly
or continuously while parking or driving at a very
low speed, the power assist for the steering
wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent over-
heating of the power steering system and protect
it from getting damaged. While the power assist
is reduced, steering wheel operation will become
heavy. When the temperature of the power steer-
ing system goes down, the power assist level will
return to normal. Avoid repeating such steering
POWER STEERING
5-20 Starting and driving
wheel operations that could cause the power
steering system to overheat.
You may hear a sound when the steering wheel is
operated quickly. However, this is not a malfunc-
tion.
If the electric power steering warning light PS
illuminates while the engine is running, it may
indicate the power steering system is not func-
tioning properly and may need servicing. Have
the power steering system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
When the electric power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running, there will be
no power assist for the steering but you will still
have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater
steering effort is required to operate the steering
wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low
speeds.
For additional information, refer to “Power steer-
ing warning light” in the “Instruments and con-
trols” section of this manual.
The brake system has two separate hydraulic
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still
have braking at two wheels.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be
required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-
tance will be longer.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while
driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the
brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and
downshift to a lower gear before going down a
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may
reduce braking performance and could result in
loss of vehicle control.
WARNING
● While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-
erating could cause the wheels to skid
and result in an accident.
● If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the brakes will not work. Braking will be
harder.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle
may pull to one side during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to
heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return
to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high
speeds until the brakes function correctly.
Parking brake break-in
Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened
or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or
drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the
best braking performance.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Starting and driving 5-21
This procedure is described in the vehicle service
manual. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
(ABS)
WARNING
● The ABS is a sophisticated device, but it
cannot prevent accidents resulting from
careless or dangerous driving tech-
niques. It can help maintain vehicle con-
trol during braking on slippery surfaces.
Remember that stopping distances on
slippery surfaces will be longer than on
normal surfaces even with ABS. Stop-
ping distances may also be longer on
rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or
if you are using tire chains. Always
maintain a safe distance from the ve-
hicle in front of you. Ultimately, the
driver is responsible for safety.
● Tire type and condition may also affect
braking effectiveness.
– When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.
– When installing a spare tire, make
sure that it is the proper size and type
as specified on the Tire and Loading
Information label. For additional in-
formation, refer to “Tire and Loading
Information label” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section
of this manual.
– For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do
not lock during hard braking or when braking on
slippery surfaces. The system detects the rota-
tion speed at each wheel and varies the brake
fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking
and sliding. By preventing each wheel from lock-
ing, the system helps the driver maintain steering
control and helps to minimize swerving and spin-
ning on slippery surfaces.
Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-
press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,
but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-
ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping
distances.
Self-test feature
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that
tests the system each time you start the engine
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or
reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear
a “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-
tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the
ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The
brake system then operates normally but without
anti-lock assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Normal operation
The ABS operates at speeds above5-10km/h
(3 - 6 mph). The speed varies according to road
conditions.
5-22 Starting and driving
When the ABS senses that one or more wheels
are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly ap-
plies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action
is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You
may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a
noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from
the actuator when it is operating. This is normal
and indicates that the ABS is operating properly.
However, the pulsation may indicate that road
conditions are hazardous and extra care is re-
quired while driving.
BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal ex-
ceeds a certain level, the brake assist is activated
generating greater braking force than a conven-
tional brake booster even with light pedal force.
WARNING
The brake assist is only an aid to assist
braking operation and is not a collision
warning or avoidance device. it is the driv-
ers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely
and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses
various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve-
hicle motion. Under certain driving conditions,
the VDC System helps to perform the following
functions:
● Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel
slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is
transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on
the same axle.
● Controls brake pressure and engine output
to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle
speed (traction control function).
● Controls brake pressure at individual wheels
and engine output to help the driver maintain
control of the vehicle in the following condi-
tions:
– understeer (vehicle tends to not follow
the steered path despite increased steer-
ing input)
– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to
certain road or driving conditions)
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain
control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of
vehicle control in all driving situations.
When the VDC system operates, the
indi-
cator in the instrument panel flashes so note the
following:
● The road may be slippery or the system may
determine some action is required to help
keep the vehicle on the steered path.
● You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal
and hear a noise or vibration from under the
hood. This is normal and indicates that the
VDC system is working properly.
● Adjust your speed and driving to the road
conditions.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy-
namic Control (VDC) OFF switch” in the ”Instru-
ments and controls” section of this manual.
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
and indicator lights come on in the instru-
ment panel. The VDC system automatically turns
off when these indicator lights are on.
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC
system. The
indicator illuminates to indi-
cate the VDC system is off.
When the VDC switch is used to turn off the
system, the VDC system still operates to prevent
one drive wheel from slipping by transferring
power to a non slipping drive wheel. The
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
Starting and driving 5-23
indicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDC
functions are off and the
indicator will not
flash.
The VDC system is automatically reset to on
when the ignition switch is placed in the off
position then back to the on position.
The computer has a built in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start the
engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse
at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you
may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in
the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an
indication of a malfunction.
WARNING
● The VDC system is designed to help the
driver maintain stability but does not
prevent accidents due to abrupt steer-
ing operation at high speeds or by care-
less or dangerous driving techniques.
Reduce vehicle speed and be especially
careful when driving and cornering on
slippery surfaces and always drive
carefully.
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
If suspension parts such as shock ab-
sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,
bushings and wheels are not NISSAN
recommended for your vehicle or are
extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly. This could
adversely affect vehicle handling per-
formance and the
indicator may
flash.
● If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
deteriorated, the VDC system may not
operate properly and the
indica-
tor light may illuminate.
● If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
deteriorated, the
indicator light
may illuminate.
● When driving on extremely inclined sur-
faces such as higher banked corners,
the VDC system may not operate prop-
erly and the
indicator may flash or
the
indicator light may illuminate.
Do not drive on these types of roads.
● When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
ramp, the
indicator may flash or
the
indicator light may illuminate.
This is not a malfunction. Restart the
engine after driving onto a stable
surface.
● If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN
recommended ones are used, the VDC
system may not operate properly and
the
indicator may flash and
the
indicator light may illuminate.
● The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.
BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
During braking while driving through turns, the
system optimizes the distribution of force to each
of the front and rear wheels depending on the
radius of the turn.
5-24 Starting and driving
WARNING
● The VDC system is designed to help the
driver maintain stability but does not
prevent accidents due to abrupt steer-
ing operation at high speeds or by care-
less or dangerous driving techniques.
Reduce vehicle speed and be especially
careful when driving and cornering on
slippery surfaces and always drive
carefully.
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
If suspension parts such as shock ab-
sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,
bushings and wheels are not NISSAN
recommended for your vehicle or are
extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly. This could
adversely affect vehicle handling per-
formance, and the
indicator may
flash or the
indicator light may
illuminate.
● If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
deteriorated, the VDC system may not
operate properly and the
indica-
tor light may illuminate.
● If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
deteriorated, the
indicator light
may illuminate.
● When driving on extremely inclined sur-
faces such as higher banked corners,
the VDC system may not operate prop-
erly and the
indicator may flash or
the
indicator light may illuminate.
Do not drive on these types of roads.
● When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
ramp, the
indicator may flash or
the
indicator light may illuminate.
This is not a malfunction. Restart the
engine after driving onto a stable
surface.
● If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN
recommended ones are used, the VDC
system may not operate properly and
the
indicator may flash or
the
indicator light may illuminate.
● The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-
icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key
hole or use the remote keyless entry key fob (if so
equipped).
ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-
perature will drop below 0°C (32°F), check the
anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.
For additional information, refer to “Engine cool-
ing system” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely
cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may
freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-
mum efficiency, the battery should be checked
regularly. For additional information, refer to “Bat-
tery” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-
freeze, drain the cooling system, including the
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.
For additional information, refer to “Changing
engine coolant” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
Starting and driving 5-25
TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry pave-
ment. However, the performance of these
tires will be substantially reduced in snowy
and icy conditions. If you operate your ve-
hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-
mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL
SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and
availability information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S.
states and Canadian provinces prohibit their
use. Check local, state and provincial laws
before installing studded tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
3. Tire chains may be used. For additional in-
formation, refer to “Tire chains” in the “Do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items be
carried in the vehicle during winter:
● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove
ice and snow from the windows and wiper
blades.
● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the
jack to give it firm support.
● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
● Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield-
washer fluid reservoir.
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
● Wet ice (0°C, 32°F and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” under
these conditions. Try to avoid driving on
wet ice until the road is salted or
sanded.
● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-
tion. Accelerate and slow down with
care. If accelerating or downshifting too
fast, the drive wheels will lose even
more traction.
● Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
● Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of
ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-
ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,
and avoid any sudden steering
maneuvers.
● Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold
temperature starting.
The engine block heater should be used when
the outside temperature is -7°C (20°F) or lower.
5-26 Starting and driving
WARNING
● Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical system or
a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seri-
ously injured by an electrical shock if
you use an ungrounded connection.
● Disconnect and properly store the en-
gine block heater cord before starting
the engine. Damage to the cord could
result in an electrical shock and can
cause serious injury.
● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-
tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug
the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded
110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the
proper extension cord or a grounded
outlet can result in a fire or electrical
shock and cause serious personal
injury.
To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block
heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension
cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-
volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in
for at least2-4hours, depending on outside
temperatures, to properly warm the engine
coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the
engine block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-
erly store the cord to keep it away from
moving parts.
Starting and driving 5-27
MEMO
5-28 Starting and driving
6 In case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher switch ......................6-2
Flat tire ...........................................6-2
Changing a flat tire .............................6-2
Jump starting ....................................6-10
Push starting.....................................6-12
If your vehicle overheats ...........................6-12
Towing your vehicle ...............................6-13
Towing recommended by NISSAN ..............6-14
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) .........6-15
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency condi-
tions. All turn signal lights flash.
WARNING
● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
move the vehicle well off the road.
● Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless
unusual circumstances force you to
drive so slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.
● Turn signals do not work when the haz-
ard warning flasher lights are on.
The flashers will operate with the ignition switch
placed in any position.
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-
low:
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
brake. Shift the Automatic Transmission
(A/T) or the models into P (Park) or the
Manual Transmission (M/T) model into R
(Reverse).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to
signal professional road assistance person-
nel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
and clear of the vehicle.
LIC0394
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH
FLAT TIRE
6-2 In case of emergency
WARNING
● Make sure the parking brake is securely
applied and the Automatic Transmis-
sion (A/T) models is shifted into P
(Park), or the Manual Transmission
(M/T) model into R (Reverse).
● Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
● Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-
sional road assistance.
A. Blocks
B. Flat tire
Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and back
of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to
prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked
up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.
Getting the spare tire and tools
Open the rear hatch.
Lift the floorboard.
LCE2142 LCE2083
In case of emergency 6-3
1. Remove the jacking tools from the storage
location.
2. Loosen the bolt
䊊
1
counterclockwise to
lower the spare.
3. Stop turning the bolt when the spare is
lowered to the point where the tire basket
䊊
2
can be removed from the hook
䊊
3
.
4. Remove the wheel basket by pushing the
basket upward.
5. Lower the tire basket to the ground and take
out the spare.
LCE2088
LCE2102
6-4 In case of emergency
Removing wheel cover (if so
equipped)
To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod
䊊
1
as illustrated.
Apply cloth
䊊
2
between the wheel and jack rod to
prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.
CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel
caps or wheel covers. Doing so could re-
sult in personal injury.
Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or
wheel surface.
Jacking up vehicle and removing the
damaged tire
WARNING
● Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is nec-
essary to work under the vehicle, sup-
port it with safety stands.
● Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the
jack provided with your vehicle on other
vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting
only your vehicle during a tire change.
● Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
● Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
● Never use blocks on or under the jack.
● Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true
for vehicles with limited slip
differentials.
● Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off
the ground. It may cause the vehicle to
move.
SCE0630 LCE2104
In case of emergency 6-5
Always refer to the proper illustrations for the
correct placement and jack-up points for your
specific vehicle model and jack type.
Carefully read the caution label attached to
the jack body and the following instruc-
tions.
1. Loosen each wheel nut 1 or 2 turns by
turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut
wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts
until the tire is off the ground.
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
point as illustrated so the top of the jack
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Align the jack head between the 2 notches in
the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the
groove of the jack head between the
notches as shown.
The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the
vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-
move the wheel nuts, and then remove the
tire.
Installing the spare tire
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-
tween the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten
the wheel nuts finger tight.
3.
With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts
alternately and evenly in the sequence illus-
trated (
䊊
A
,
䊊
B
,
䊊
C
,
䊊
D
) until they are tight.
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely
in the sequence illustrated (
䊊
A
,
䊊
B
,
䊊
C
,
䊊
D
).
Lower the vehicle completely.
LCE2059 WCE0048
6-6 In case of emergency
WARNING
● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
● Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts
to become loose.
● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-
hicle has been driven for 1,000 km
(621 miles) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts
to the specified torque with a torque
wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
113 N·m (83 ft-lb)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
specification at all times. It is recom-
mended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specification at each lubrication interval.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After the vehicle has been
parked for 3 hours or more or driven less
than 1.6 km (1 mile).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the “Tire
and loading information label”.
5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-
ment in the vehicle.
WARNING
Always make sure that the spare tire and
jacking equipment are properly secured
after use. Such items can become danger-
ous projectiles in an accident or sudden
stop.
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
Reinstalling the temporary spare tire to
its original position
After the flat tire is repaired, return the temporary
spare to its original position in the tire basket
under the rear of the vehicle.
1. Open the rear hatch.
2. Remove the luggage floor.
3. Loosen bolt
䊊
1
counterclockwise approxi-
mately 20 turns using the wheel nut wrench
and wrench extension to lower the tire bas-
ket.
4. Stop turning the bolt when the tire basket is
lowered to a place where it can be removed
from the hook. Do not loosen the bolt
excessively, otherwise the basket may
fall suddenly.
LCE2125
In case of emergency 6-7
5. Hold the tire basket and remove it from the
hook by pushing the basket
䊊
2
upward and
moving the hook
䊊
3
to release the basket.
6. Lower the tire basket slowly to the ground
and then put in the temporary spare tire
䊊
4
.
7. Reinstall the tire basket by pushing upward
on the basket
䊊
5
and inserting the hook
䊊
6
.
LCE2097 LCE2098 LCE2099
6-8 In case of emergency
Please be sure that the hook is located as
shown in the image
䊊
7
. The hook must
engage from the inside of the basket.
8. Tighten the bolt
䊊
8
clockwise until the bolt is
tight using the wheel nut wrench and
wrench extension to move the tire basket up
to the holding position.
WARNING
● Always make sure that the spare tire,
tire basket and jacking equipment are
properly secured after use. Such items
can become dangerous projectiles in an
accident or sudden stop.
● The spare tire is designed for emer-
gency use. For additional information
refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-
it-yourself” section of this manual.
● When reinstalling the spare tire basket
under the vehicle after use, be sure that
the hook engages the basket from the
inside. If the spare tire basket hook is
not engaged properly, there is an in-
creased risk of the spare tire separating
from the vehicle in a crash and causing
injury.
LCE2100 LCE2126
In case of emergency 6-9
Stowing the damaged tire
Securely store the damaged tire in the cargo area
as illustrated.
Securely store the jack and tools in the storage
area.
Return the spare tire basket back to its original
position in the reverse order of removal. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Getting the spare
tire and tools” in this section.
NOTE:
The spare tire basket cannot be used to
store the conventional tire.
WARNING
● Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly se-
cured after each use. Such items can
become dangerous projectiles in an ac-
cident or sudden stop.
● Make sure that the spare tire basket is
properly secured in its original position
after removing the spare tire.
● The spare tire and small size spare tire
are designed for emergency use. For
additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
To start your engine with a booster battery, the
instructions and precautions below must be fol-
lowed.
WARNING
● If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in
severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
● Explosive hydrogen gas is always pres-
ent in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all
sparks and flames away from the
battery.
● Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-
rosive sulfuric acid solution which can
cause severe burns. If the fluid should
come into contact with anything, imme-
diately flush the contacted area with
water.
● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
● The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
battery can damage your vehicle.
LCE2248
JUMP STARTING
6-10 In case of emergency
● Whenever working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protectors (for
example, goggles or industrial safety
spectacles) and remove rings, metal
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
over the battery when jump starting.
● Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause se-
rious injury.
● Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any
time. Keep hands and other objects
away from it.
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below. Fail-
ure to do so could result in damage to the
charging system and cause personal
injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,
position the 2 vehicles to bring their batter-
ies near each other.
Do not allow the 2 vehicles to touch.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever
to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P
(Park) (automatic transmission). Switch off
all unnecessary electrical systems (lights,
heater, air conditioner, etc.).
3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so
equipped). Cover the battery with an old
cloth to reduce explosion hazard.
4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-
lustrated (
䊊
A
,
䊊
B
,
䊊
C
,
䊊
D
).
WCE0054
In case of emergency 6-11
CAUTION
● Always connect positive (⫹) to positive
(⫹) and negative (⫺) to body ground (for
example, strut mounting bolt, engine
lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.
● Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine com-
partment and that the cable clamps do
not contact any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and
let it run for a few minutes.
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-
hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-
gine of the vehicle being jump started.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does
not start right away, turn the key off and
wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-
nect the negative cable and then the positive
cable.
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be
sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover
the vent holes as it may be contaminated
with corrosive acid.
CAUTION
● Do not push start this vehicle. The
three-way catalyst may be damaged.
● Automatic Transmission (AT) models
and Manual Transmission (MT) cannot
be push-started or tow-started. At-
tempting to do so may cause transmis-
sion damage.
● For Manual Transmission (MT) models,
never try to start the vehicle by towing it.
When the engine starts, the forward
surge could cause the vehicle to collide
with the tow vehicle.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by a red
high temperature warning light
), or if you
feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal
noise, etc. take the following steps.
WARNING
● Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause engine
damage or a vehicle fire.
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator cap while the
engine is still hot. When the radiator
cap is removed, pressurized hot water
will spurt out, possibly causing serious
injury.
● Do not open the hood if steam is com-
ing out.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply
the parking brake and move the shift lever to
N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P
(Park) (automatic transmission).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air conditioner
temperature control to maximum hot and fan
control to high speed.
PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
6-12 In case of emergency
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator
before opening the hood. (If steam or cool-
ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not
open the hood further until no steam or
coolant can be seen.
4. Open the engine hood.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
running. The radiator hoses and radiator
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,
the water pump belt is missing or loose, or
the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-
gine.
WARNING
● Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or
the engine cooling fan. The engine cool-
ing fan can start at any time.
● If coolant is leaking, or the cooling fan
does not run, stop the engine.
6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-
ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank
with the engine running. Add coolant to the
engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.
Have your vehicle repaired. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
When towing your vehicle, all Provinces in
Canada and local regulations for towing must be
followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-
age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-
able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-
tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage to your
vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service
operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have
the service operator carefully read the following
precautions:
WARNING
● Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
● Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
● When towing, make sure that the trans-
mission, axles, steering system and
powertrain are in working condition. If
any of these conditions apply, dollies or
a flatbed tow truck must be used.
● Always attach safety chains before
towing.
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
In case of emergency 6-13
For additional information about towing your ve-
hicle behind a Recreational Vehicle (RV), refer to
“Flat towing” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed
with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or
place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.
䊊
A
Automatic Transmission (A/T)
䊊
B
Manual Transmission (M/T)
LCE2014
6-14 In case of emergency
CAUTION
● Never tow automatic transmission
models with the front wheels on the
ground or four wheels on the ground
(forward or backward), as this may
cause serious and expensive damage to
the transmission. If it is necessary to
tow the vehicle with the rear wheels
raised always use towing dollies under
the front wheels.
● When towing automatic transmission
models with the front wheels on towing
dollies, or when towing manual trans-
mission models with the front wheels
on the ground:
– Place the ignition switch to the OFF
position, and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device. Never
secure the steering wheel by placing
the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion. This may damage the steering
lock mechanism.
– Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral)
position.
● When towing automatic or manual
transmission models with the rear
wheels on the ground (if you do not use
towing dollies): Always release the
parking brake.
● Observe the following restricted towing
speeds and distances for Manual Trans-
missions (M/T) only:
– Speed: Below 80 km/h (50 mph)
– Distance: Less than 80 km (50 miles)
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck
vehicle)
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal
injury or death when recovering a stuck
vehicle:
● Contact a professional towing service
to recover the vehicle if you have any
questions regarding the recovery
procedure.
● Tow chains or cables must be attached
only to main structural members of the
vehicle.
● Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow
or free a stuck vehicle.
䊊
A
Automatic Transmission (A/T)
䊊
B
Manual Transmission (M/T)
LCE2015
In case of emergency 6-15
● Only use devices specifically designed
for vehicle recovery and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.
● Always pull the recovery device straight
out from the front of the vehicle. Never
pull at an angle.
● Route recovery devices so they do not
touch any part of the vehicle except the
attachment point.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use a tow strap or other device designed specifi-
cally for vehicle recovery. Always follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery de-
vice.
Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
● Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use the following procedure:
1. Make sure the area in front and behind the
vehicle is clear of obstructions.
2. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
an area around the front tires.
3. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-
ward.
● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and D (Drive) (A/T models) or 1st (Low)
and R (Reverse) (M/T models).
● Apply the accelerator as little as possible
to maintain the rocking motion.
● Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive) (A/T models) or 1st (Low) and R
(Reverse) (M/T models).
● Do not spin the tires above 55 km/h
(35 mph).
4. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few
tries, contact a professional towing service
to remove the vehicle.
6-16 In case of emergency
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior ..................................7-2
Washing ......................................7-2
Waxing........................................7-2
Removing spots ................................7-3
Underbody ....................................7-3
Glass .........................................7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) ...........7-3
Chrome parts ..................................7-3
Tire dressings ..................................7-3
Cleaning interior...................................7-4
Air fresheners ..................................7-4
Floor mats . . ...................................7-5
Seat belts .....................................7-6
Corrosion protection ...............................7-6
Most common factors contributing to vehicle
corrosion ......................................7-6
Environmental factors influence the rate of
corrosion ......................................7-6
Protect your vehicle from corrosion...............7-7
In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-
hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
● After a rainfall to prevent possible damage
from acid rain.
● After driving on coastal roads.
● When contaminants such as soot, bird drop-
pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get
on the paint surface.
● When dust or mud builds up on the surface.
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle
inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body
cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface
when putting on or removing the body
cover.
WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of
water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild
soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose
dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm
(never hot) water.
CAUTION
● Do not use car washes that use acid in
the detergent. Some car washes, espe-
cially brushless ones, use some acid for
cleaning. The acid may react with some
plastic vehicle components, causing
them to crack. This could affect their
appearance, and also could cause them
not to function properly. Always check
with your car wash to confirm that acid
is not used.
● Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical deter-
gents, gasoline or solvents.
● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-
light or while the vehicle body is hot, as
the surface may become water-spotted.
● Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-
stances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean
water.
Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors,
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to
the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the
drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
open. Spray water under the body and in the
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to
avoid water spots.
WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is
recommended to remove built-up wax residue
and to avoid a weathered appearance before
re-applying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
proper product.
● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-
ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the
wax.
● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
cutting compounds or cleaners that may
damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
CLEANING EXTERIOR
7-2 Appearance and care
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,
and tree sap as quickly as possible from the
surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or
staining. Special cleaning products are available
at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory
store. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these products.
UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is
necessary to clean the underbody regularly in
order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-
derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-
riod and again in the spring, the underseal must
be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.
GLASS
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to
become coated with a film after the vehicle is
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft
cloth will easily remove this film.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows,
do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive
cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant
cleaners. They could damage the electrical
conductors, radio antenna elements or
rear window defroster elements.
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so
equipped)
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-
ened in a mild soap solution, especially during
winter months in areas where road salt is used. If
not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
●
Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid
or alkali contents to clean the wheels.
● Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as am-
bient temperature.
● Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the
cleaner is applied.
CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-
abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-
ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may
react with the coating and form a compound. This
compound may come off the tire while driving and
stain the vehicle paint.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-
ing on the tire dissolves more easily than
with an oil-based tire dressing.
● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to
remove).
● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-
pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.
● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-
mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.
Appearance and care 7-3
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-
ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a
dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to
maintain the appearance of the leather.
Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-
facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-
tectors contain chemicals that may stain or
bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean
the meter and gauge lens.
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can dam-
age the seat or occupant classification
sensor. This can also affect the operation
of the air bag system and result in serious
personal injury.
CAUTION
● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-
lar material.
● Small dirt particles can be abrasive and
damaging to leather surfaces and
should be removed promptly. Do not
use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,
oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents or ammonia-based cleaners as
they may damage the leather’s natural
finish.
● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-
ommended by the manufacturer.
● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-
age the lens cover.
AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect
the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,
take the following precautions:
● Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-
manent discoloration when they contact ve-
hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-
ener in a location that allows it to hang free
and not contact an interior surface.
● Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on
the vents. These products can cause imme-
diate damage and discoloration when
spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions before using the air fresheners.
CLEANING INTERIOR
7-4 Appearance and care
FLOOR MATS
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference that
may result in a collision, injury or death:
● NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-
other floor mat in the driver front posi-
tion or install them upside down or
backwards.
● Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats, or
equivalent floor mats, that are specifi-
cally designed for use in your vehicle
model and model year.
● Properly position the mats in the floor-
well using the floor mat positioning
hook. For additional information, refer
to ⴖFloor mat installationⴖ in this
section.
● Make sure the floor mat does not inter-
fere with pedal operation.
● Periodically check the floor mats to
make sure they are properly installed.
● After cleaning the vehicle interior,
check the floor mats to make sure they
are properly installed.
The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can
extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it
easier to clean the interior. Mats should be main-
tained with regular cleaning and replaced if they
become excessively worn.
Floor mat installation
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat position-
ing hook(s). The number and shape of the floor
mat positioning hooks for each seating position
varies depending on the vehicle.
When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,
follow the installation instructions provided with
the mat and the following:
1. Position the floor mat in the floorwell so that
the floor mat grommet holes are aligned with
the hook(s).
2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook(s)
and ensure that the floor mat is properly
positioned.
3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere
with pedal operation. With the ignition in the
OFF position, the selector lever in the P
(Park) position (Automatic Transmission
models) or the shift lever in the N (Neutral)
position (Manual Transmission models) fully
apply and release all pedals. The floor mat
must not interfere with pedal operation or
prevent the pedal from returning to its nor-
mal position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for details about installing the floor mats in your
vehicle.
WAI0006
Appearance and care 7-5
The illustration shows the location of the floor mat
positioning hooks.
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.
Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade
before using them. For additional information,
refer to “Seat belt maintenance” in the “Safety-
–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint
system” section of this manual.
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,
since these materials may severely
weaken the seat belt webbing.
MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:
● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,
and other areas.
● Damage to paint and other protective coat-
ings caused by gravel and stone chips or
minor traffic collisions.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-
hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.
Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside
the vehicle and should be removed for drying to
avoid floor panel corrosion.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity, especially those areas where
the temperatures stay above freezing and where
atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is
used.
Positioning hooks
LAI2047
CORROSION PROTECTION
7-6 Appearance and care
Temperature
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-
sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-
ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-
erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.
PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
● Always check for minor damage to the paint
and repair it as soon as possible.
● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
open to avoid water accumulation.
● Check the underbody for accumulation of
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
as soon as possible.
CAUTION
● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-
bris from the passenger compartment
by washing it out with a hose. Remove
dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
● Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
and deterioration of underbody components
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,
brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
For additional protection against rust and corro-
sion, which may be required in some areas, it is
recommended that you consult a NISSAN dealer.
Appearance and care 7-7
MEMO
7-8 Appearance and care
8 Do-it-yourself
Maintenance precautions ...........................8-2
Engine compartment check locations ................8-3
Engine cooling system .............................8-4
Checking engine coolant level ...................8-5
Changing engine coolant ........................8-5
Engine oil.........................................8-6
Checking engine oil level ........................8-6
Changing engine oil ............................8-7
Changing engine oil filter ........................8-8
4-speed automatic transmission fluid (ATF)
(if so equipped) ...................................8-8
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid ...............8-9
Brake fluid .....................................8-9
Clutch (if so equipped) fluid .....................8-9
Windshield-washer fluid...........................8-10
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir ...............8-10
Battery ..........................................8-10
Jump starting .................................8-12
Drive belt ........................................8-12
Spark plugs......................................8-13
Replacing spark plugs .........................8-13
Air cleaner .......................................8-14
In-cabin microfilter (if so equipped) ..............8-14
Windshield wiper blades ..........................8-15
Cleaning .....................................8-15
Replacing ....................................8-15
Brakes ..........................................8-16
Fuses ...........................................8-17
Engine compartment ...........................8-17
Passenger compartment .......................8-18
Battery replacement ..............................8-20
Key fob (if so equipped) ........................8-20
Lights ...........................................8-21
Headlights....................................8-21
Headlight aim .................................8-23
Fog lights (if so equipped) ......................8-25
Exterior and interior lights.......................8-26
Wheels and tires .................................8-31
Tire pressure..................................8-31
Tire
labeling...................................8-33
Types of tires..................................8-36
Tire chains....................................8-37
Changing wheels and tires .....................8-37
When performing any inspection or maintenance
work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent
serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to
the vehicle. The following are general precau-
tions which should be closely observed.
WARNING
● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-
ply the parking brake securely and
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle
from moving. For manual transmission
models, move the shift lever to N (Neu-
tral). For Automatic Transmission (A/T)
move the shift lever to P (Park)
● Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or
LOCK position when performing any
parts replacement or repairs.
● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-
matic engine cooling fan. It may come
on at any time without warning, even if
the ignition key is in the OFF position
and the engine is not running. To avoid
injury, always disconnect the negative
battery cable before working near the
fan.
● If you must work with the engine run-
ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair
and tools away from moving fans, belts
and any other moving parts.
● It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jewelry,
such as rings, watches, etc. before
working on your vehicle.
● Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.
● If you must run the engine in an en-
closed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.
● Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is neces-
sary to work under the vehicle, support
it with safety stands.
● Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
● On gasoline engine models, the fuel
filter or fuel lines should be serviced
because the fuel lines are under high
pressure even when the engine is off. It
is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
● Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.
● Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Al-
ways conform to local regulations for
disposal of vehicle fluid.
● Never leave the engine or automatic
transmission related component har-
nesses disconnected while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
● Never connect or disconnect the battery
or any transistorized component while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
This “Do-it-yourself” section gives instructions
regarding only those items which are relatively
easy for an owner to perform.
You should be aware that incomplete or improper
servicing may result in operating difficulties or
excessive emissions, and could affect warranty
coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, it
is recommended that you have it done by a
NISSAN dealer.
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
8-2 Do-it-yourself
HR16DE engine
1. Drive belt location
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Air cleaner
4. Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid
reservoir
5. Fusible link
6. Battery
7. Engine coolant reservoir
8. Radiator cap
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
LDI3055
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
Do-it-yourself 8-3
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and
50% water to provide year-round antifreeze and
coolant protection. The antifreeze solution con-
tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional en-
gine cooling system additives are not necessary.
WARNING
● Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down. Serious burns could be caused
by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator. For additional information
on precautions, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emer-
gency” section of this manual.
● The radiator is equipped with a pres-
sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-
gine damage, use only a Genuine
NISSAN radiator cap.
CAUTION
● Never use any cooling system additives
such as radiator sealer. Additives may
clog the cooling system and cause dam-
age to the engine, transmission and/or
cooling system.
● When adding or replacing coolant, be
sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted
to provide antifreeze protection to -34°
F (-37° C). If additional freeze protection
is needed due to weather where you
operate your vehicle, add Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
(blue) concentrate following the direc-
tions on the container. If an equivalent
coolant other than Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is
used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s
instructions to maintain minimum anti-
freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The
use of other types of coolant solutions
other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent
may damage the engine cooling
system.
● The life expectancy of the factory-fill
coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or
7 years. Mixing any other type of cool-
ant other than Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), includ-
ing Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use
of non-distilled water will reduce the
life expectancy of the factory-fill cool-
ant. For additional information, refer to
the ⴖMaintenance and schedulesⴖ sec-
tion of this manual.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
8-4 Do-it-yourself
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
the MIN level
䊊
B
, add coolant to the MAX level
䊊
A
. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant
level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If
there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the
radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and
also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level
䊊
A
.
This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of
the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles
(168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of
coolant or the use of non-distilled water will re-
duce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant.
For additional information, refer to the “Mainte-
nance and schedules” section of this manual.
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information on the location of the
engine coolant reservoir, refer to “Engine com-
partment check locations” in this section.
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.
The service procedure can be found in the
NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheat-
ing.
WARNING
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the en-
gine is hot.
● Never remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. Serious burns could be
caused by high pressure fluid escaping
from the radiator.
● Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-
dren and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.
LDI2794
Do-it-yourself 8-5
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than
10 minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-
insert it all the way.
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil
level. It should be between the H (High) and
L (Low) marks
䊊
B
. This is the normal oper-
ating oil level range. If the oil level is below
the L (Low) mark
䊊
A
, remove the oil filler cap
and pour recommended oil through the
opening. Do not overfill
䊊
C
.
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some engine oil be-
tween oil maintenance intervals depending
on the severity of operating conditions or
depending on the property of the engine oil
used. More engine oil is consumed by fre-
quent acceleration/deceleration especially
when the engine rpm is high. Consumption
is likely to be higher when the engine is
new. If the rate of oil consumption, after
driving for 3,000 miles (5,000 km), is more
than 0.5 liter per 600 miles (1,000 km), con-
sult a NISSAN dealer
CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-
erating the engine with an insufficient
amount of oil can damage the engine, and
such damage is not covered by warranty.
LDI2855 LDI2795
ENGINE OIL
8-6 Do-it-yourself
CHANGING ENGINE OIL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature, then turn it off.
3. Remove the oil filler cap
䊊
A
by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug
䊊
B
.
5. Remove the drain plug
䊊
B
with a wrench by
turning it counterclockwise and completely
drain the oil.
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and
replace it at this time. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Changing engine oil filter” in
this section.
WARNING
● Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
● Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
● Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
CAUTION
● Be careful not to burn yourself. The en-
gine oil may be hot.
● Waste oil must be disposed of properly.
● Check your local regulations.
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug
䊊
B
and a
new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug
䊊
B
with a wrench. Do not use excessive
force.
Drain plug tightening torque:
25 ft-lb (34 N·m)
7. Refill engine with recommended oil through
the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler
cap
䊊
A
securely.
For additional information on drain and refill
capacity, refer to “Recommended
fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the
“Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
The drain and refill capacity depends on the
oil temperature and drain time. Use these
specifications for reference only. Always use
the dipstick to determine when the proper
amount of oil is in the engine.
8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around
the drain plug
䊊
B
and oil filter. Correct as
required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level with the
dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.
LDI2788
Do-it-yourself 8-7
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter
䊊
B
.
4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench
by turning it counterclockwise. Then remove
the oil filter by turning it by hand.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with
a clean rag.
CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket material
remaining on the sealing surface of the
engine. Failure to do so could lead to
engine damage.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean
engine oil .
7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance
is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.
Oil filter tightening torque:
13 ft-lbs (18 N·m)
8. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine
oil by removing the oil filler cap
䊊
A
if neces-
sary.
When checking or replacement of automatic
transmission fluid is required, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
WARNING
● When the engine is running, keep
hands, jewelry and clothing away from
any moving parts such as the cooling
fan and drive belts.
● Automatic transmission fluid is poison-
ous and should be stored carefully in
marked containers out of the reach of
children.
LDI2789
4-SPEED AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) (if so
equipped)
8-8 Do-it-yourself
For additional information on brake fluid specifi-
cation, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants
and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
WARNING
● Use only new fluid from a sealed con-
tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake and clutch
(if so equipped) systems. The use of
improper fluids can damage the brake
and clutch system and affect the vehi-
cle’s stopping ability.
● Clean the filler cap before removing.
● Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous and
should be stored carefully in marked
containers out of reach of children.
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-
faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is
spilled, immediately wash the surface with
water.
BRAKE FLUID
Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the
fluid level is below the MIN line
䊊
B
, or the brake
warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN
Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the
MAX line
䊊
A
. If fluid must be added frequently,
the system should be checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
CLUTCH (if so equipped) FLUID
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. The brake
fluid reservoir is shared with the clutch hydraulic
system for manual transmissions. If the level is
below the MIN line
䊊
B
, or the brake warning light
comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line
䊊
A
.If
fluid must be added frequently, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for ser-
vicing.
LDI2790 LDI2790
BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped)
FLUID
Do-it-yourself 8-9
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Add a washer solvent to the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir for better cleaning. In the winter
season, add a windshield-washer antifreeze. Fol-
low the manufacturer’s instructions for the mix-
ture ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
conditions require an increased amount of
windshield-washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN
Windshield-Washer Fluid Concentrate Cleaner
& Antifreeze or equivalent.
CAUTION
● Do not substitute engine antifreeze
coolant for windshield-washer solution.
This may result in damage to the paint.
● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with washer fluid concen-
trates at full strength. Some methyl al-
cohol based washer fluid concentrates
may permanently stain the grille if
spilled while filling the windshield-
washer fluid reservoir.
● Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-
centrates with water to the manufactur-
er’s recommended levels before pour-
ing the fluid into the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir. Do not use the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir to
mix the washer fluid concentrate and
water.
● Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of baking
soda and water.
● Make certain the terminal connections are
clean and securely tightened.
● If the vehicle is not going to be used for
30 days or longer, disconnect the negative
(-) battery terminal cable to prevent dis-
charge.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic
accessories that consume battery power
when the engine is not running (Phone char-
gers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only
driven short distances. In these cases, the
battery may need to be charged to maintain
battery health.
LDI2791
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID BATTERY
8-10 Do-it-yourself
WARNING
● Do not expose the battery to flames,
electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen
gas generated by the battery is explo-
sive. Explosive gases can cause blind-
ness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or
painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can
cause blindness or severe burns. After
touching a battery or battery cap, do not
touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly
wash your hands. If the acid contacts
your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15 minutes
and seek medical attention.
● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in
the battery is low. Low battery fluid can
cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce battery
life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.
● When working on or near a battery, al-
ways wear suitable eye protection and
remove all jewelry.
● Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent
caps tight and the battery level.
● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-
cessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds. Wash hands after handling.
● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as
shown.
WDI0528
Do-it-yourself 8-11
2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled
water to bring the level up to the bottom of
the filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall
the vent caps.
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump start-
ing” in the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual. If the engine does not start by jump
starting, the battery may have to be replaced. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
1. Water pump pulley
2. Generator pulley
3. Crankshaft pulley
4. Air conditioner compressor pulley (if so
equipped) /Idler pulley (if so equipped)
5. Manual tensioner pulley
䉱 Tension checking point
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF or LOCK position before servicing
drive belt. The engine could rotate
unexpectedly.
WDI0529
HR16DE engine
WDI0695
DRIVE BELT
8-12 Do-it-yourself
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual
wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is in poor
condition, have it replaced or adjusted. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-
tion.
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Platinum-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped
䊊
A
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type
spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-
low the maintenance log shown in the ⬙Mainte-
nance and Schedules⬙ section of this manual. Do
not service platinum-tipped spark plugs by clean-
ing or regapping.
● Always replace spark plugs with rec-
ommended or equivalent ones.
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are
off and that the parking brake is engaged
securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to re-
move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket
can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped
䊊
A
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type
spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-
low the maintenance log shown in the “Mainte-
nance and schedules” section of this manual. Do
not service iridium-tipped spark plugs by clean-
ing or regapping.
● Always replace spark plugs with rec-
ommended or equivalent ones.
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are
off and that the parking brake is engaged
securely.
SDI1895
SPARK PLUGS
Do-it-yourself 8-13
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to re-
move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket
can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
● Operating the engine with the air
cleaner filter off can cause you or others
to be burned. The air cleaner filter not
only cleans the intake air, it also stops
the flame if the engine backfires. If the
air cleaner is not installed and the en-
gine backfires, you could be burned.
Never drive with the air cleaner filter off.
Be cautious working on the engine
when the air cleaner is off.
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body or
attempt to start the engine with the air
cleaner removed. Doing so could result
in serious injury.
To remove the filter from the air cleaner, release
the retaining clips
䊊
A
, then release the holders at
the back of the unit. Pull the unit upward
䊊
B
.
The viscous paper type filter element should not
be cleaned and reused. Replace the air filter
according to the maintenance log shown in a
separate maintenance booklet.
When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside of
the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp
cloth.
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER (if so
equipped)
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-
borne dust and pollen particles and reduces
some objectionable outside odors. The filter is
located behind the glove box. For additional in-
formation, refer to the ⬙Maintenance and sched-
ules⬙ section of this manual for change intervals.
If replacement is required, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LDI2708
AIR CLEANER
8-14 Do-it-yourself
CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the
windshield–washer or if a wiper blade chatters
when running, wax or other material may be on
the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer
fluid or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean
if beads do not form when rinsing with clear
water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked
in a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Then rinse
the blades with clear water. If your windshield is
still not clear after cleaning the blades and using
the wiper, install new windshield wiper blades.
CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-
age the windshield and impair driver
vision.
REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
To replace the windshield wiper blades, follow
the procedure below:
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
2. Push the release tab
䊊
A
.
3. Move the wiper blade
䊊
B
down and remove.
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
arm until it clicks into place.
5. Push wiper on to windshield.
CAUTION
● After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when the
hood is opened.
● Make sure the wiper blades contact the
glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-
aged from wind pressure.
LDI2725
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Do-it-yourself 8-15
If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not
to let wax get into the washer nozzle
䊊
D
. This may
cause clogging or improper windshield-washer
operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it
with a needle or small pin
䊊
C
.
Rear window wiper blade
If checking or replacement is required, it is rec-
ommend that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
If the brakes do not operate properly, have the
brakes checked. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The front disc-type brakes self-adjust every time
the brake pedal is applied. The rear drum-type
brakes self-adjust every time the parking brake is
applied.
WARNING
Have your brake system checked if the
brake pedal height does not return to nor-
mal. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Brake pad wear indicators
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible
wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-
placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-
ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in
motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the
brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.
LDI2710
BRAKES
8-16 Do-it-yourself
Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-
sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may
be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to
moderate stops is normal and does not affect the
function or performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For additional information regard-
ing brake inspections, refer to the appropriate
maintenance schedule information in the ⬙Main-
tenance and Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
Fuses are used in the passenger compartment.
Spare fuses are provided and can be found in the
passenger compartment fuse box.
When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is
installed in the fuse box securely.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not operate and
the fuses are in good condition, check the fusible
links
䊊
A
in the holder. If any of the fusible links are
melted, replace only with Genuine NISSAN
parts.
For checking and replacing the fusible links, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
LDI2385 LDI2858
FUSES
Do-it-yourself 8-17
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or electronic control
units or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
NOTE:
The fuse box is located on the driver’s side
of the instrument panel.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Remove the fuse box cover
䊊
A
with a suit-
able tool. Use a cloth to avoid damaging the
trim.
3. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller
䊊
B
.
5. If the fuse is open
䊊
C
, replace it with an
equivalent good fuse
䊊
D
.
6. Push the fuse box cover to install.
If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with all
fuses listed on the fuse label.
LDI2712 LDI2713
8-18 Do-it-yourself
Extended storage switch
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
remove the extended storage switch and check
for an open fuse.
NOTE:
The extended storage switch is used for
long term vehicle storage. Even if the ex-
tended storage switch is broken it is not
necessary to replace it. Replace only the
open fuse in the switch with a new fuse.
How to replace the extended storage switch:
1. To remove the extended storage switch, be
sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or
LOCK position.
2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF
position.
3. Remove the fuse box cover.
4. Pinch the locking tabs
䊊
A
and
䊊
B
found on
each side of the storage switch.
5. Pull the storage switch straight out from the
fuse box
䊊
C
.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with all
fuses listed on the fuse label.
LDI2747
Do-it-yourself 8-19
CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swallow
the battery or removed parts.
KEY FOB (if so equipped)
Replace the battery in the key fob as follows:
1. Remove the screw
䊊
A
.
2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the
corner
䊊
B
and twist it to separate the upper
part from the lower part. Use a cloth to
protect the casing.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
● Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-
tric terminals as doing so could cause a
malfunction.
● Make sure that the + side faces the bot-
tom of the case
䊊
C
.
Recommended battery: CR1620 or equivalent.
4. Close the lid and install the screw securely.
5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.
If replacement is required, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, perform step 5.
● An improperly disposed battery can
hurt the environment. Always confirm
local regulations for battery disposal.
● The key fob is water-resistant; how-
ever, if it does get wet, immediately
wipe completely dry.
SDI2134A
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
8-20 Do-it-yourself
● The operational range of the key fob
extends to approximately 10 m (33 ft)
from the vehicle. This range may vary
with conditions.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Note:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-
tion is subject to the following two condi-
tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-
ference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the de-
vice.
HEADLIGHTS
For additional information on headlight bulb re-
placement, refer to the instructions outlined in
this section.
LIGHTS
Do-it-yourself 8-21
Replacing the halogen headlight bulb
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which
uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb.
They can be replaced from inside the engine
compartment without removing the headlight as-
sembly.
CAUTION
● High-pressure halogen gas is sealed in-
side the bulb. The bulb may break if the
glass envelope is scratched or the bulb
is dropped.
● Aiming should not be necessary after
replacing the H4 bulb. When aiming ad-
justment is necessary, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
● Do not leave the headlight assembly
open without a bulb installed for a long
period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,
etc. entering the headlight body may
affect bulb performance. Remove the
bulb from the headlight assembly just
before a replacement bulb is installed.
● Only touch the base when handling the
bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.
Touching the glass could significantly
affect bulb life and/or headlight
performance.
● Use the same number and wattage as
shown in the chart.
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector
䊊
A
from
the rear end of the bulb.
3. Pull off the rubber cap
䊊
B
.
4. Push and turn the retaining pin
䊊
C
to loosen
it.
5. Remove the headlight bulb. Do not shake or
rotate the bulb when removing it.
6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of
removal.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A
temperature difference between the inside and
the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not
a malfunction. If large drops of water collect
inside the lens, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for servicing.
JVM0002X
8-22 Do-it-yourself
HEADLIGHT AIM
The aim of the headlights may require adjustment
when replacing the headlight assembly or when
the vehicle’s front body has been repaired. When
the adjustment is required, follow these proce-
dures, or have them adjusted by a NISSAN
dealer.
Before performing the headlights aim adjust-
ment:
● Check the pressure of all tires for the correct
inflation pressure.
● Check that the tools and spare tire are
stowed securely.
● Check that the fuel and lubricants levels are
filled to correct capacities.
● Unload all luggage and other items, which
may influence the vehicle’s height level.
● Load a weight on the driver’s seat that is
equivalent to the weight of a driver.
Stopping the vehicle
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface vertical to
the wall or screen to which the headlights
will be projected.
2. Move the vehicle close to the wall to deter-
mine the point P as shown in the illustration.
The point P must be:
“H” is the distance between the headlight’s
center point to the level surface.
“WL” is the distance between the left and
right headlights’ centers.
3. Mark point P on the wall or screen.
LDI2422 LDI2423
Do-it-yourself 8-23
4. Back up the vehicle 5,000 mm (197.0 in,
16.4 ft) straight away from the wall or
screen.
”L” is the distance between the wall or
screen to the vehicle’s front bumper.
5. Apply the parking brake.
Adjusting the headlight aim
Be sure that the vehicle is parked directly vertical
to the wall on which the headlights will be pro-
jected.
1. Turn on the headlight low beam
2. Open the hood.
3. Turn the aiming adjustment screws
䊊
1
䊊
2
,
located inside the engine compartment, until
the headlight projection, on the wall or
screen, does not move.
NOTE:
The aim adjustment screws are located on
each side of the headlights. The lower
screw
䊊
1
is used to adjust the horizontal
aim. The upper screw
䊊
2
is used to adjust
the vertical aim.
The screws can be turned indefinitely in
each direction. Therefore be sure to ob-
serve the headlight projection movement
to determine the necessary turning
amount.
LDI2979
8-24 Do-it-yourself
4. Turn the lower screws
䊊
1
in the opposite
direction until the headlight projection be-
comes 70 mm (2.76 in) below the point P.
Once the left headlight has been adjusted,
perform right side adjustment as well.
”C” is the distance between point P and
point
䊊
3
.
5. Turn the upper screws
䊊
2
in the opposite
direction until the horizontal headlight pro-
jection’s turn point
䊊
3
is directly below the
point P. Once the left headlight has been
adjusted, perform right side adjustment as
well.
FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
Replacing the fog light bulb
If replacement is required, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
● High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is scratched
or the bulb is dropped.
● When handling the bulb, do not touch
the glass envelope.
● Use the same number and wattage as
originally installed as shown in the
chart.
● Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light
for a long period of time as dust, mois-
ture and smoke may enter the fog light
body and affect the performance of the
fog light.
Do-it-yourself 8-25
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*
Headlight assembly
High/Low (Halogen)/Daytime running light 60/55 H4
Turn* 28 3457NAK
Park* 5 W5W
Side marker* 5 W5W
Fog light (if so equipped)* 55 H11
Interior light 5 W5W
Cargo light 5 12V5W
High-mounted stop light type A (if so equipped) 16 W16W
High-mounted stop light type B (if so equipped)* — —
Rear combination light*
Turn signal 21 WY21W
Stop/Tail 21/5 W21/5W
Backup (reversing) 16 W16W
License plate light 5 W5W
Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.
* If replacement is required it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
8-26 Do-it-yourself
1. Headlight assembly
2. Interior light
3. Fog light (if so equipped)
4. Rear combination light
5. High-mounted stop light
6. License plate light
LDI2864
Do-it-yourself 8-27
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When
replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp
and/or cover.
Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation
Use a cloth to protect the housing.
SDI1805
Interior light
LDI2044
8-28 Do-it-yourself
To replace the bulbs in the rear combination light:
䊊
1
Remove the rear combination light mounting
bolts.
䊊
2
Carefully remove the gasket protector.
䊊
3
Pull rear combination light toward the rear of
the vehicle and disconnect the rear combi-
nation light connector to remove the assem-
bly.
Remove bulbs by turning counterclockwise and
replace with new bulbs.
To replace the high-mounted stop light bulb
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.
Rear combination light
LDI2374
High-mounted stop light (if so equipped):
LDI2071
Do-it-yourself 8-29
2. Remove the lens cover of the high-mounted
stop light by inserting an appropriate re-
mover tool between the top of the lens cover
(the side not touching the glass of the rear
door) and the vehicle
䊊
A
. Pull toward you.
3. After the cover is removed, disconnect the
harness connector and remove the high-
mounted stop light bulb
䊊
B
by rotating it
counterclockwise.
4. Replace with new bulb and reinstall cover.
To replace the luggage compartment light bulb:
1. Remove the light
䊊
A
with a suitable tool.
2. Remove the cover
䊊
B
.
3. Replace the bulb.
License plate light
JVC0014X
Cargo light
JVM0007X
8-30 Do-it-yourself
If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in
the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual.
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including the
spare) often and always prior to long dis-
tance trips. The recommended tire pres-
sure specifications are shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label under the
“Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire
and Loading Information label is affixed to
the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures
should be checked regularly because:
● Most tires naturally lose air over time.
● Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects
or if the vehicle strikes a curb while
parking.
The tire pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold. The tires are
considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours or driven
less than 1.6 km (1 mile) at moderate
speeds.
Incorrect tire pressure, including un-
der inflation, may adversely affect
tire life and vehicle handling.
WARNING
● Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly and cause an accident.
● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the C.M-
.V.S.S. certification label. The ve-
hicle weight capacity is indicated
on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label. Do not load your ve-
hicle beyond this capacity. Over-
loading your vehicle may result in
reduced tire life, unsafe operat-
ing conditions due to premature
tire failure, or unfavorable han-
dling characteristics and could
also lead to a serious accident.
Loading beyond the specified ca-
pacity may also result in failure of
other vehicle components.
● Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge
to ensure that the tire pressures
are at the specified level.
WHEELS AND TIRES
Do-it-yourself 8-31
Tire and loading information label
䊊
1
Seating capacity: The maximum num-
ber of occupants that can be seated
in the vehicle.
䊊
2
Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Vehicle
loading information” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of
this manual.
䊊
3
Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” in
this section.
䊊
4
Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
this pressure when the tires are cold.
Tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or more
hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The
recommended cold tire inflation is set
by the manufacturer to provide the
best balance of tire wear, vehicle
handling, driveability, tire noise, etc.,
up to the vehicle’s GVWR.
䊊
5
Original tire size: The size of the tires
originally installed on the vehicle at
the factory.
䊊
6
Spare tire size.
LDI2007
8-32 Do-it-yourself
Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the
tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely
onto the valve stem. Do not press too
hard or force the valve stem side-
ways, or air will escape. If the hissing
sound of air escaping from the tire is
heard while checking the pressure,
reposition the gauge to eliminate this
leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge
stem and compare to the specifica-
tion shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core of
the valve stem briefly with the tip of
the gauge stem to release pressure.
Recheck the pressure and add or
release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
including the spare.
Size Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Front Original Tire:
P185/60R15
185/55R16
230 kPa, 33 PSI
Rear Original Tire:
P185/60R15
185/55R16
230 kPa, 33 PSI
Spare:
T125/70D15
420 KPa, 60 PSI
TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information iden-
tifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also pro-
vides the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in case of a
recall.
LDI0393
Example
WDI0394
Do-it-yourself 8-33
䊊
1
Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-
signed for passenger vehicles (not all
tires have this information).
2. Three-digit number (215): This num-
ber gives the width in millimeters of
the tire from sidewall edge to side-
wall edge.
3. Two-digit number (65): This number,
known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (15): This number
is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This
number is the tire’s load index. It is a
measurement of how much weight
each tire can support. You may not
find this information on all tires be-
cause it is not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not
drive the vehicle faster than the tire
speed rating.
Example
WDI0395
8-34 Do-it-yourself
䊊
2
TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-
ment Of Transportation”. The symbol
can be placed above, below or to the
left or right of the Tire Identification
Number.
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional).
5. Four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For ex-
ample, the numbers 3103 means the
31st week of 2003. If these numbers
are missing then look on the other
sidewall of the tire.
䊊
3
Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rubber-
coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-
ers also must indicate the materials in the
tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester
and others.
䊊
4
Maximum permissible inflation pressure
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should be put in the tire. Do
not exceed the maximum permissible in-
flation pressure.
䊊
5
Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum load
in kilograms and pounds that can be car-
ried by the tire. When replacing the tires
on the vehicle, always use a tire that has
the same load rating as the factory in-
stalled tire.
䊊
6
Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
Indicates whether the tire requires an in-
ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).
䊊
7
The word “radial”
The word “radial” is shown if the tire has
radial structure.
䊊
8
Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is shown.
Example
LDI2786
Do-it-yourself 8-35
Other Tire-related Terminology
In addition to the many terms that are
defined throughout this section, Intended
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the
other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-
ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must
always face outward when mounted on a
vehicle.
TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
● When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information about
tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
● Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory equipped
tires, and may not match the potential
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed
the maximum speed rating of the tire.
● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information
Booklet.
All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-
els to provide good performance all year, includ-
ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season
tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S
on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow
traction than All Season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models
to provide superior performance on dry roads.
Summer tire performance is substantially re-
duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have
the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy
conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of
SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four
wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and load rating to the
original equipment tires. If you do not, it can
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings
than factory equipped tires and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-
ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the same
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all
four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires
may be used. However, some Canadian prov-
inces prohibit their use. Check local, state and
provincial laws before installing studded tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow
tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than
that of non-studded snow tires.
8-36 Do-it-yourself
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION
Tire chains/cables should not be installed
on 185/60R15 or 185/55R16 tires. Installa-
tion of the tire chains/cables on
185/60R15 or 185/55R16 tires will cause
damage to the vehicle. Please use snow
tires instead of chains/cables if needed.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire.
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires
every 8,000 km (5,000 miles).
For additional information on tire replac-
ing procedures, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In
case of emergency” section in this
manual.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
113 N·m (83 ft-lb)
The wheel nuts must be kept tight-
ened to specifications at all times. It
is recommended that wheel nuts be
tightened to specification at each
tire rotation interval.
WARNING
● After rotating the tires, check and
adjust the tire pressure.
● Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
1,000 km (600 miles) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.)
● Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation.
● For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in the Warranty In-
formation Booklet.
WDI0258
Do-it-yourself 8-37
Tire wear and damage
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
WARNING
● Tires should be periodically in-
spected for wear, cracking, bulg-
ing or objects caught in the tread.
If excessive wear, cracks, bulging
or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)
should be replaced.
● The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
● Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be ob-
vious. Replace the tires as neces-
sary to prevent tire failure and
possible personal injury.
● Improper service of the spare tire
may result in serious personal in-
jury. If it is necessary to repair the
spare tire, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
● For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” or in the
Warranty Information Booklet.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity
as originally equipped. Recommended types and
sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.
WARNING
● The use of tires other than those recom-
mended or the mixed use of tires of
different brands, construction (bias,
bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns
can adversely affect the ride, braking,
handling, ground clearance, body-to-
tire clearance, tire chain clearance,
speedometer calibration, headlight aim
and bumper height. Some of these ef-
fects may lead to accidents and could
result in serious personal injury.
● If your vehicle was originally equipped
with four tires that were the same size
and you are only replacing two of the
four tires, install the new tires on the
rear axle. Placing new tires on the front
axle may cause loss of vehicle control in
some driving conditions and cause an
accident and personal injury.
WDI0259
8-38 Do-it-yourself
● If the wheels are changed for any rea-
son, always replace with wheels which
have the same off-set dimension.
Wheels of a different off-set could
cause premature tire wear, degrade ve-
hicle handling characteristics and/or in-
terference with the brake discs/drums.
Such interference can lead to de-
creased braking efficiency and/or early
brake pad/shoe wear. For additional in-
formation on wheel off-set dimensions,
refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Tech-
nical and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
● Do not install a damaged or deformed
wheel or tire even if it has been re-
paired. Such wheels or tires could have
structural damage and could fail with-
out warning.
● The use of retread tires is not
recommended.
Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get
out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-
anced as required.
Wheel balance service should be per-
formed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Tire Safety Information”
in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Care of wheels
● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle
to maintain their appearance.
● Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
wheel is changed or the underside of the
vehicle is washed.
● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing
the wheels.
● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
● NISSAN recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in areas
where it is used during winter.
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire)
Observe the following precautions if the TEM-
PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or
involved in an accident:
WARNING
● The spare tire should be used for emer-
gency use only. It should be replaced
with the standard tire at the first oppor-
tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-
tial damage.
● Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid
sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving.
● Periodically check spare tire inflation
pressure. Always keep the pressure of
the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).
● With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire installed do not drive the vehicle at
speeds faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
Do-it-yourself 8-39
● When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on the
rear wheels and the original tire used
on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use
tire chains only on the front (original)
tires.
● Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate
than the standard tire. Replace the
spare tire as soon as the tread wear
indicators appear.
● Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
● Do not use more than one spare tire at
the same time.
● Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.
CAUTION
● Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains
will not fit properly and may cause dam-
age to the vehicle.
● Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire is smaller than the original
tire, ground clearance is reduced. To
avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive
the vehicle through an automatic car
wash since it may get caught.
8-40 Do-it-yourself
9 Maintenance and schedules
Maintenance requirements..........................9-2
General maintenance ...........................9-2
Scheduled maintenance.........................9-2
Where to go for service .........................9-2
General maintenance ..............................9-2
Explanation of general maintenance items .........9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items .........9-5
Emission Control System Maintenance: ...........9-5
Chassis and Body Maintenance: .................9-6
Maintenance schedules ............................9-7
Additional Maintenance Items for severe
operating conditions ............................9-7
Standard maintenance .............................9-7
Emission control system maintenance.............9-8
Chassis & body maintenance ...................9-10
Maintenance under severe operating conditions......9-12
Severe driving conditions.......................9-12
Maintenance log..................................9-13
Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is es-
sential to maintain your vehicle good mechanical
condition, as well as its emissions and engine
performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general
maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
can ensure that your vehicle receives proper
maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-
nance chain.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those items which
should be checked during normal day-to-day op-
eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-
eration. It is your responsibility to perform these
procedures regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks requires
minimal mechanical skill and only a few general
automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done by
yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a
NISSAN dealer.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
The maintenance items listed in this section are
required to be serviced at regular intervals. How-
ever under severe driving conditions, additional
or more frequent maintenance will be required.
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle
appears to malfunction, have the systems
checked and serviced. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
and are kept up-to-date with the latest service
information through technical bulletins, service
tips and training programs. They are completely
qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before
work begins.
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s
service department can perform the service
needed to meet the maintenance requirements
on your vehicle.
During the normal day-to-day operation of the
vehicle, general maintenance should be per-
formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a
NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if
you think that repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance
work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-
tions” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with“*”isfound in the “Do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE
9-2 Maintenance and schedules
Doors and engine hood: Check that the doors
and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure
that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,
latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary.
Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the
hood from opening when the primary latch is
released.
When driving in areas using road salt or other
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis.
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all
operating properly and installed securely. Also
check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if
necessary.
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every
8,000 km (5,000 miles).
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often
and always prior to long distance trips. If neces-
sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the
spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully
for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components: Replace the TPMS
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle
should pull to either side while driving on a
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel
alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at
normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to
“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) or “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) in the Warranty
Information Booklet.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular
basis. Check the windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-
aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair
facility.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks
or wear if they do not wipe properly.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked on a regular basis, such as when per-
forming scheduled maintenance, cleaning the ve-
hicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth
operation and make sure the pedal does not
catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat
away from the pedal.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth op-
eration. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down
further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the
vehicle seems to take longer to stop, have your
vehicle checked immediately. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the
vehicle to one side when applied.
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
P (Park) position mechanism (if so
equipped): On a fairly steep hill check that the
vehicle is held securely with the shift lever in the P
(Park) position without applying any brakes.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake opera-
tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held
on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake
applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment, it
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
Maintenance and schedules 9-3
Seats: Check seat position controls such as
seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure
they operate smoothly and all latches lock se-
curely in every position. Check that the head
restraints/headrests move up and down
smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold
securely in all latched positions.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,
and are installed securely. Check the belt web-
bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
steering system, such as excessive free play,
hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all
warning lights and chimes are operating properly.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in
sufficient quantity when operating the heater or
air conditioner.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that
the wipers and washer operate properly and that
the wipers do not streak.
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked periodically (for example, each time you
check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery* (for serviceable batteries): Check
the fluid level in each cell. It should be between
the MAX and MIN lines. Vehicles operated in high
temperatures or under severe conditions require
frequent checks of the battery fluid level.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic
accessories that consume battery power
when the engine is not running (Phone char-
gers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only
driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be
charged to maintain battery health.
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid
level*: Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid
levels are between the MIN and MAX lines on the
reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level
when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive belts
are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking
the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.
Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to drain
back into the oil pan.
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust
system inspected. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon
monoxide)”in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,
water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the
air conditioner after use is normal. If you should
notice any leaks or if fuel fumes are evident,
check for the cause and have it corrected imme-
diately.
9-4 Maintenance and schedules
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
connections.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently ex-
posed to corrosive substances such as those
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
important to remove these substances from the
underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor
pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the
end of winter, the underbody should be thor-
oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas
where mud and dirt may have accumulated. For
additional information, refer to the “Appearance
and care” section of this manual.
Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that there is
adequate fluid in the reservoir.
The following descriptions are provided to give
you a better understanding of the scheduled
maintenance items that should be regularly
checked or replaced. The maintenance schedule
indicates at which mileage/time intervals each
item requires service.
In addition to scheduled maintenance, your ve-
hicle requires that some items be checked during
normal day-to-day operation. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “General maintenance” in this
section.
Items marked with “*” are recommended by
NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. You are
not required to perform maintenance on these
items in order to maintain the warranties which
come with your NISSAN. Other maintenance
items and intervals are required.
When applicable, additional information can be
found in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
NOTE:
NISSAN does not advocate the use of non-
OEM approved aftermarket flushing sys-
tems and strongly advises against perform-
ing these services on a NISSAN product.
Many of the aftermarket flushing systems
use non-OEM approved chemicals or sol-
vents, the use of which has not been vali-
dated by NISSAN.
For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,
grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recom-
mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
in the “Technical and consumer informa-
tion” section of this manual.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE:
Drive belts*:
Check engine drive belts for wear, fraying or
cracking and for proper tension. Replace any
damaged drive belts.
Engine air filter:
Replace at specified intervals. When driving for
prolonged periods in dusty conditions,
check/replace the filter more frequently.
Engine coolant*:
Replace coolant at the specified interval. When
adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only
Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
(blue) or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For
additional information on the proper mixture for
your area, refer to “Engine cooling system” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.)
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Maintenance and schedules 9-5
NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant or
the use of non-distilled water may reduce
the recommended service interval of the
coolant.
Engine oil and oil filter:
Replace engine oil and oil filter at the specified
intervals. For recommended oil grade and viscos-
ity refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities” in the “Technical and consumer infor-
mation” section of this manual.
Engine valve clearance*:
Inspect only if valve noise increases. Adjust valve
clearance if necessary.
Evaporative emissions control vapour
lines*:
Check vapour lines for leaks or looseness.
Tighten connections or replace parts as neces-
sary.
Fuel filter:
Periodic maintenance is not required. (in-tank
type filter)
Fuel lines*:
Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections for
leaks, looseness, or deterioration. Tighten con-
nections or replace parts as necessary.
Spark plugs:
Replace at specified intervals. Install new plugs
of the type as originally equipped.
CHASSIS AND BODY
MAINTENANCE:
Brake lines and cables:
Visually inspect for proper installation. Check for
chafing, cracks, deterioration, and signs of leak-
ing. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts
immediately.
Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings:
Check for wear, deterioration and fluid leaks.
Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts im-
mediately.
Exhaust system:
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and
hangers for leaks, cracks, deterioration, and dam-
age. Tighten connections or replace parts as
necessary.
In-cabin microfilter:
Replace at specified intervals. When driving for
prolonged periods in dusty conditions, replace
the filter more frequently.
Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts, drive shaft boots:
Check for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil
or grease. Under severe driving conditions, in-
spect more frequently.
Tire rotation:
Tires should be rotated every 8,000 km
(5,000 miles) according to the instructions under
“General maintenance” in this section. When ro-
tating tires, check for damage and uneven wear.
Replace if necessary.
Transmission fluid/oil:
Visually inspect for signs of leakage at specified
intervals.
If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top
carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads:
● Replace the manual transaxle gear oil every
32,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months.
● Replace the CVT fluid every 96,000 km
(60,000 miles) or request the dealer to in-
spect the fluid deterioration data using a
CONSULT. If the deterioration data is more
than 210000, replace the CVT fluid. .
9-6 Maintenance and schedules
To help ensure smooth, safe and economical
driving, NISSAN provides two maintenance
schedules that may be used, depending upon the
conditions in which you usually drive. These
schedules contain both distance and time inter-
vals, up to 192,000 km
(120,000 miles)/144 months. For most people,
the odometer reading will indicate when service
is needed. However, if you drive very little, your
vehicle should be serviced at the regular time
intervals shown in the schedule.
After 192,000 km
(120,000 miles)/144 months, continue
maintenance at the same mileage/time in-
tervals.
ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
FOR SEVERE OPERATING
CONDITIONS
Additional maintenance items for severe
operating conditions should be performed on
vehicles that are driven under especially de-
manding conditions. Additional maintenance
items should be performed if you primarily oper-
ate your vehicle under the following conditions:
● Repeated short trips of less than 8 km
(5 miles).
● Repeated short trips of less than 16 km
(10 miles) with outside temperatures re-
maining below freezing.
● Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go
“rush hour” traffic.
● Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for
long distances, such as taxi or door-to-door
delivery use.
● Driving in dusty conditions.
● Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
NOTE:
For vehicles operated in Canada, both
standard and severe maintenance items
should be performed at every interval.
The following tables show the standard mainte-
nance schedule. Depending upon weather and
atmospheric conditions, varying road surfaces,
individual driving habits and vehicle usage, addi-
tional or more frequent maintenance may be re-
quired. After 192,000 km
(120,000 miles)/144 months, continue
maintenance at the same mileage/time in-
terval.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES STANDARD MAINTENANCE
Maintenance and schedules 9-7
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of kilometers, miles or
months, whichever comes first.
km x 1,000
(miles x 1,000)
Months
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
8
(5)
6
16
(10)
12
24
(15)
18
32
(20)
24
40
(25)
30
48
(30)
36
56
(35)
42
64
(40)
48
72
(45)
54
80
(50)
60
88
(55)
66
96
(60)
72
Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I*
Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R
Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR
Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR
Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)
EVAP vapour lines I* I* I*
Fuel lines I* I* I*
Fuel filter See NOTE (3)
Spark plugs (Iridium - tipped type) See NOTE (6) Replace every 168,000 km (105,000 miles)
Intake and exhaust valve clearances See NOTE (7)
9-8 Maintenance and schedules
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of kilometers, miles or
months, whichever comes first.
km x 1,000
(miles x 1,000)
Months
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
104
(65)
78
112
(70)
84
120
(75)
90
128
(80)
96
136
(85)
102
144
(90)
108
152
(95)
114
160
(100)
120
168
(105)
126
176
(110)
132
184
(115)
138
192
(120)
144
Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*
Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R
Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR
Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR
Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)
EVAP vapour lines I* I* I*
Fuel lines I* I* I*
Fuel filter See NOTE (3)
Spark plugs (Iridium - tipped type) See NOTE (6) Replace every 168,000 km (105,000 miles)
Intake and exhaust valve clearances See NOTE (7)
NOTE:
(1) After 64,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months, inspect every 16,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged.
(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(3) Periodic maintenance is not required.
(4) First replacement interval is 168,000 km (105,000 miles) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles) or 60 months.
(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ration of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or
distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill coolant.
(6) For MRA8DE:
Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 1.35 mm (0.053 in) even within specified periodic replacement mileage.
For MR16DDT:
Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 1.1 mm (0.043 in) even within specified periodic replacement mileage.
(7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such
maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
Maintenance and schedules 9-9
CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of kilometers, miles or months, whichever
comes first.
km x 1,000
(miles x 1,000)
Months
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
8
(5)
6
16
(10)
12
24
(15)
18
32
(20)
24
40
(25)
30
48
(30)
36
56
(35)
42
64
(40)
48
72
(45)
54
80
(50)
60
88
(55)
66
96
(60)
72
Brake lines and cables I I I I I I
Brake pads, rotors, drum and linings 夝 II I II I
Brake fluid 夝 RRR
CVT fluid See NOTE (1) I I I I I I
Manual transmission gear oil See NOTE (2) I I I I I I
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts 夝 III
Tire rotation See NOTE (3)
Front drive shaft boots 夝 II I II I
Exhaust system 夝 III
In-cabin microfilter RRRR
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery R R R R
9-10 Maintenance and schedules
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of kilometers, miles or months, which-
ever comes first.
km x 1,000
(miles x 1,000)
Months
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
104
(65)
78
112
(70)
84
120
(75)
90
128
(80)
96
136
(85)
102
144
(90)
108
152
(95)
114
160
(100)
120
168
(105)
126
176
(110)
132
184
(115)
138
192
(120)
144
Brake lines and cables IIIIII
Brake pads, rotors, drum and linings 夝 IIIIII
Brake fluid 夝 RRR
CVTfluid SeeNOTE(1)IIIIII
Manual transmission gear oil See NOTE (2) IIIIII
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts 夝 III
Tire rotation See NOTE (3)
Front drive shaft boots 夝 IIIIII
Exhaust system 夝 III
In-cabin microfilter RRRR
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery R R R R
NOTE:
Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance Under Severe Driving Conditions”.
(1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration at NISSAN
dealer every 96,000 km (60,000 miles), then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect)
CVT fluid every 96,000 km (60,000 miles).
(2) If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 32,000 km
(20,000 miles) or 24 months.
(3) For additional information, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.
Maintenance and schedules 9-11
The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under severe driving
conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table.
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
● Repeated short trips of less than 8 km
(5 miles).
● Repeated short trips of less than 16 km
(10 miles) with outside temperatures re-
maining below freezing.
● Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go
“rush hour” traffic.
● Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for
long distance, such as taxi or door-to-door
delivery use.
● Driving in dusty conditions.
● Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.
Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval
Brake fluid Replace Every 16,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
Brake pads, rotors, drum and lining Inspect Every 8,000 km (5,000 miles) or 6 months
Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Inspect Every 8,000 km (5,000 miles) or 6 months
Front drive shaft boots Inspect Every 8,000 km (5,000 miles) or 6 months
Exhaust system Inspect Every 8,000 km (5,000 miles) or 6 months
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE
OPERATING CONDITIONS
9-12 Maintenance and schedules
8,000 km (5,000 Miles) or 6 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
16,000 km (10,000 Miles) or
12 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
24,000 km (15,000 Miles) or
18 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
32,000 km (20,000 Miles) or
24 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
40,000 km (25,000 Miles) or
30 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
48,000 km (30,000 Miles) or
36 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
56,000 km (35,000 Miles) or
42 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
64,000 km (40,000 Miles) or
48 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
72,000 km (45,000 Miles) or
54 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
MAINTENANCE LOG
Maintenance and schedules 9-13
80,000 km (50,000 Miles) or
60 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
88,000 km (55,000 Miles) or
66 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
96,000 km (60,000 Miles) or
72 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
104,000 km (65,000 Miles) or
78 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
112,000 km (70,000 Miles) or
84 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
120,000 km (75,000 Miles) or
90 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
128,000 km (80,000 Miles) or
96 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
136,000 km (85,000 Miles) or
102 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
144,000 km (90,000 Miles) or
108 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
9-14
Maintenance and schedules
152,000 km (95,000 Miles) or
114 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
160,000 km (100,000 Miles) or
120 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
168,000 km (105,000 Miles) or
126 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
176,000 km (110,000 Miles) or
132 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
184,000 km (115,000 Miles) or
138 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
192,000 km (120,000 Miles) or
144 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
Maintenance and schedules 9-15
MEMO
9-16 Maintenance and schedules
10 Technical and consumer information
Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities ......10-2
Fuel recommendation ..........................10-4
Engine oil and oil filter recommendations .........10-6
Air conditioner system (if so equipped)
refrigerant and oil recommendations .............10-7
Specifications....................................10-8
Engine .......................................10-8
Wheels and tires ..............................10-9
Dimensions and weights .......................10-9
When traveling or registering in another country.....10-10
Vehicle identification .............................10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate ........10-10
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) .............................10-10
Engine serial number..........................10-11
C.M.V.S.S. certification label ...................10-11
Emission control information label ..............10-11
Tire and loading information label...............10-12
Air conditioner specification label
(if so equipped) ..............................10-12
Installing front license plate (if so equipped) ........10-12
Vehicle loading information .......................10-13
Terms .......................................10-13
Determining vehicle load capacity . . ............10-14
Loading tips .................................10-16
Measurement of weights ......................10-16
Towing a trailer ..................................10-17
Flat towing...................................10-17
Uniform tire quality grading .......................10-17
Emission control system warranty .................10-18
Reporting safety defects .........................10-19
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test ....10-19
Event Data Recorders (EDR)......................10-20
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . .10-20
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Metric
Measure
US
Measure
Imperial
Measure
Fuel 41 L 10-7/8 gal 9 gal For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in this section.
Engine oil*1
Drain and refill
*1: For additional information, refer to
“Engine oil” in the “Do-it-yourself ” sec-
tion in this manual.
With oil filter
change
3.5 L 3-3/4 qt 3-1/8 qt
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 5W-30 SN” is recommended.
• If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent motor oil that
matches the above grade and viscosity. For additional information, refer
to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in this section.
• As an alternative to this recommended oil, SAE 5W-30 or SAE
10W-30 conventional petroleum based oils may be used and meet all
specifications and requirements necessary to maintain the NISSAN New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Without oil
filter change
3.2 L 3-3/8 qt 2-7/8 qt
Engine coolant with
reservoir
With automatic transmission 6.6 L 1-3/4 gal 1-1/2 gal
• Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze/ Coolant (blue) or
equivalent
With manual transmission 6.7 L 1-3/4 gal 1-1/2 gal
Manual transmission gear oil — — —
• Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85
or equivalent
• If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi is not
available, API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 may be used as a temporary
replacement. However, use Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid
(MTF) HQ Multi as soon as it is available.
Automatic transmission fluid — — —
• Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF
• Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S
ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission
durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not cov-
ered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid — — —
• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*2 or equivalent DOT 3
*2: Available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer.
Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
10-2 Technical and consumer information
Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Metric
Measure
US
Measure
Imperial
Measure
Air conditioning system refrigerant — — —
• HFC-134a (R-134a)
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system (if so
equipped) refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.
Air conditioning system oil — — —
• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type DH-PR or equivalent
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system (if so
equipped) refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.
Windshield-washer fluid 3.5 L 7/8 gal 3/4 gal
• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-
freeze or equivalent
Technical and consumer information 10-3
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-
ber (Research octane number 91).
CAUTION
● Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
● Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
● Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your
vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to
run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or
E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically
designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-
versely affect the emission control de-
vices and systems of the vehicle. Dam-
age caused by such fuel is not covered
by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
● Do not use fuel that contains the octane
booster methylcyclopentadienyl man-
ganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel
containing MMT may adversely affect
vehicle performance and vehicle emis-
sions. Not all fuel dispensers are la-
beled to indicate MMT content, so you
may have to consult your gasoline re-
tailer for more details. Note that Fed-
eral and California laws prohibit the use
of MMT in reformulated gasoline.
● U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-
fied by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbrevia-
tion or the appropriate percentage for
that region.
Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-
cations where it is available. Many of the automo-
bile manufacturers developed this specification
to improve emission control system and vehicle
performance. Ask your service station manager if
the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.
Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-
lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN
supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-
gests that you use reformulated gasoline when
available.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-
genates such as ethanol, Methyl Tert-butyl Ether
(MTBE) and methanol with or without advertising
their presence. NISSAN does not recommend
the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content
and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can-
not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your
service station manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take
the following precautions as the usage of such
fuels may cause vehicle performance problems
and/or fuel system damage.
● The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
●
If an oxygenate-blend other than metha-
nol blend is used, it should contain no
more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may,
however, be added up to 15%.)
10-4 Technical and consumer information
● E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxy-
genate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect
the emission control devices and sys-
tems of the vehicle and should not be
used. Damage caused by such fuel is
not covered by the NISSAN New Ve-
hicle Limited Warranty.
● If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable amount
of appropriate cosolvents and corro-
sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-
lated with appropriate cosolvents and
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
blends may cause fuel system damage
and/or vehicle performance problems.
At this time, sufficient data is not avail-
able to ensure that all methanol blends
are suitable for use in NISSAN ve-
hicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine stall-
ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after
using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a
low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-
eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can
cause paint damage.
E–15 fuel
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel
ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can
only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15
fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S. gov-
ernment regulations require fuel ethanol dispens-
ing pumps to be identified with small, square,
orange and black label with the common abbre-
viation or the appropriate percentage for that
region.
E–85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do
not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government
regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange
and black label with the common abbreviation or
the appropriate percentage for that region.
Fuel containing MMT
MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tri-
carbonyl, is an octane boosting additive. NISSAN
does not recommend the use of fuel containing
MMT. Such fuel may adversely affect vehicle per-
formance, including the emissions control sys-
tem. Note that while some fuel pumps label MMT
content, not all do, so you may have to consult
your gasoline retailer for more details.
Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-
tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit
removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.
Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel
system and engine.
Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can cause
persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark
knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-
vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you
detect a persistent heavy spark knock even
when using gasoline of the stated octane
rating, or if you hear steady spark knock
while holding a steady speed on level
roads, it is recommended that you have a
NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Fail-
ure to correct the condition is misuse of the
vehicle, for which NISSAN is not respon-
sible.
Technical and consumer information 10-5
Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark
knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may
cause excessive fuel consumption or engine
damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-
countered, have your vehicle checked. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
servicing.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a
cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality
and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory
engine life and performance. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants
and capacities” in this section. NISSAN recom-
mends the use of an energy conserving oil in
order to improve fuel economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-
tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-
cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-
tion mark on the front of the container. Oils which
do not have the specified quality label should not
be used as they could cause engine damage.
Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-
sary when the proper oil type is used and main-
tenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been
previously used should not be used.
LTI2061
10-6 Technical and consumer information
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes
with temperature. Because of this, it is important
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the
temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-
ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil
viscosity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When
replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or its
equivalent for the reason described in “Change
intervals.”
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your
engine are based on the use of the specified
quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters
that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding
recommended oil and filter change intervals
could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine
caused by improper maintenance or use of incor-
rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not
covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine
oil when it was built. You do not have to change
the oil before the first recommended change
interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend
upon how you use your vehicle.
Operation under the following conditions may
require more frequent oil and filter changes:
● repeated short distance driving at cold out-
side temperatures
● driving in dusty conditions
● extensive idling
● towing a trailer
● stop and go commuting
For additional information, refer to the “Mainte-
nance and schedules” section of this manual.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM (if so
equipped) REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle must be charged with the refriger-
ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSAN
A/C system oil Type DH-PR or the exact
equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil will
cause severe damage to the air condition-
ing system and will require the replace-
ment of all air conditioner system
components.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone
layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the
earth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-
tions require the recovery and recycling of any
refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-
tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained
technicians and equipment needed to recover
and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-
ant.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
when servicing your air conditioner system.
Technical and consumer information 10-7
ENGINE
Model HR16DE
Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, inline
Bore x Stroke mm (in) 78.0 x 83.6 (3.071 x 3.291)
Displacement cm
3
(cu in) 1,598 (97.51)
Firing order 1–3–4–2
Idle speed
No adjustment is necessary.
M/T
A/T in N (Neutral) position
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle
speed)
CO%atidle
Spark plug PLZKAR6A-11
Spark plug gap (Nominal) mm (in) 1.1 (0.043)
Camshaft operation Timing chain
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.
SPECIFICATIONS
10-8 Technical and consumer information
WHEELS AND TIRES
Wheel type Size Offset mm (in)
Steel 15 x 5.5J 50 (1.97)
Aluminum 16 x 6.0J 55 (2.17)
Tire size P185/60R15
185/55R16
Spare tire T125/70D15
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Body Type Hatchback
Overall length mm (in) 3,827 (150.7)
Overall width mm (in) 1,665 (65.6)
Overall height
R15 mm (in) 1,527 (60.1)
R16 mm (in) 1,532 (60.3)
Front Track
R15 mm (in) 1,460 (57.5)
R16 mm (in) 1,450 (57.1)
Rear Track
R15 mm (in) 1,465 (57.7)
R16 mm (in) 1,455 (57.3)
Wheelbase mm (in) 2,450 (96.5)
Gross vehicle weight rating
Refer to the “C.M.V.S.S. certifica-
tion label” on the center pillar be-
tween the driver’s side front and
rear doors.
Gross axle weight rating
Front
Rear
Technical and consumer information 10-9
When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-
hicle in another country, you should first find
out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-
cle’s engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles
must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-
fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where
appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify the
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-
sion control and safety standards vary according
to the country, state, province or district; there-
fore, vehicle specifications may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into an-
other country, state, province or district and
registered, its modifications, transporta-
tion and registration are the responsibility
of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for
any inconvenience that may result.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE
The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is
attached as shown. This number is the identifica-
tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle
registration.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)
The vehicle identification number is located as
shown.
TI1050M LTI2010
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
IN ANOTHER COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
10-10 Technical and consumer information
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.
C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL
The Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as
shown. This label contains valuable vehicle infor-
mation, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings
(GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR),
month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identifi-
cation Number (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.
EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL
The emission control information label is at-
tached to the underside of the hood as shown.
HR16DE
LTI2020
STI0349 LTI2004
Technical and consumer information 10-11
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and
Loading Information Label. The label is located as
shown.
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL (if so equipped)
The air conditioner specification label is affixed as
shown.
Mount the license plate to the fascia
䊊
1
using
two M6-14mm bolts (not supplied) through the
nuts. Center the license plate in the fascia and
tighten securely.
LTI0084 WTI0173 LTI2011
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
(if so equipped)
10-12 Technical and consumer information
WARNING
● It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In
a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seat
belts.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.
TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with
the following terms before loading your
vehicle:
● Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
standard and optional equipment, flu-
ids, emergency tools, and spare tire
assembly. This weight does not in-
clude passengers and cargo.
● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight of
passengers and cargo.
● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
ing) - maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-
sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
tongue load and any other optional
equipment. This information is lo-
cated on the C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -
maximum weight (load) limit specified
for the front or rear axle. This informa-
tion is located on the C.M.V.S.S. cer-
tification label.
● GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
rating) - The maximum total weight
rating of the vehicle, passengers,
cargo, and trailer.
● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,
Total load capacity - maximum total
weight limit specified of the load
(passengers and cargo) for the ve-
hicle. This is the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo that
can be loaded into the vehicle. If the
vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the
trailer tongue weight must be in-
cluded as part of the cargo load. This
information is located on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
● Cargo capacity - permissible weight
of cargo, the subtracted weight of
occupants from the load limit.
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
Technical and consumer information 10-13
DETERMINING VEHICLE LOAD
CAPACITY
The load capacity of this vehicle is deter-
mined by weight, not by available cargo
space. For example, a luggage rack, bike
carrier, cartop carrier or similar equipment
does not increase load carrying capacity
of your vehicle.
To determine vehicle load capacity:
Vehicle weight can be determined by us-
ing a commercial-grade scale, found at
places such as a truck stop, gravel quarry,
grain elevator, or a scrap metal recycling
facility.
1. Determine the curb weight of your
vehicle.
2. Compare the curb weight amount to
the GVWR specified for your vehicle
to determine how much more weight
your vehicle can carry.
3. After loading (cargo and passen-
gers), re-weigh your vehicle to deter-
mine if either GVWR or GAWR for
your vehicle is exceeded. If GVWR is
exceeded, remove cargo as neces-
sary. If either the front or rear GAWR
is exceeded, shift the load or remove
cargo as necessary.
10-14
Technical and consumer information
Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX
kg” on your vehicle’s Tire and Load-
ing Information label.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX lbs
or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capac-
ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150)
= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
300 kg.)
Example
WTI0169
Technical and consumer information 10-15
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in
step 4.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.
For additional information, refer to “Mea-
surement of weights” in this section.
Also check tires for proper inflation pres-
sures. For additional information, refer to
“Tire and Loading Information label”in this
section.
LOADING TIPS
● The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the C.M-
.V.S.S. certification label.
● Do not load the front and rear axle to
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the
GVWR.
WARNING
● Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seat-
backs. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
● Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear GAWRs.
If you do, parts of your vehicle can
break, tire damage could occur,
or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could result
in loss of control and cause per-
sonal injury.
● Overloading and improper load-
ing not only can shorten the life
of your vehicle and the tire, but
can also cause unsafe vehicle
handling and longer braking dis-
tances. This may cause a prema-
ture tire failure which could result
in a serious accident and per-
sonal injury. Failures caused by
overloading are not covered by
the vehicle’s warranty.
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent weight
shifts that could affect the balance of your
vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive
to a scale and weigh the front and the rear
wheels separately to determine axle
loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-
ceed either of the Gross Axle Weight
Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle
loads should not exceed the Gross Ve-
hicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These rat-
ings are given on the vehicle certification
label. If weight ratings are exceeded,
move or remove items to bring all weights
below the ratings.
10-16
Technical and consumer information
Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.
FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground is sometimes called flat towing. This
method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle
behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor
home.
CAUTION
● Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-
ways tow forward, never backward.
● Never tow your front wheel drive vehicle
with the front tires on the ground. Doing
so may cause serious and expensive
damage to the powertrain.
● DO NOT tow any continuously variable
transmission vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground (flat towing). Do-
ing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmis-
sion parts due to lack of transmission
lubrication.
● For emergency towing procedures refer
to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”
in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
Manual Transmission (if so equipped)
● Always tow with the manual transmission in
Neutral.
● After towing 805 km (500 miles), start and
idle the engine with the transmission in Neu-
tral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine
after every 805 km (500 miles) of towing
may cause damage to internal transmission
parts.
Automatic Transmission (if so
equipped)
To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic
transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST
be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive
wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s
recommendations when using their product.
DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times
as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-
sured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
TOWING A TRAILER UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Technical and consumer information 10-17
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is es-
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-
ther separately or in combination, can
cause heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following
emission warranties:
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.
If you did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-
ment by writing to:
● Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
10-18 Technical and consumer information
If you believe that your vehicle has a de-
fect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immedi-
ately inform Transport Canada in addition
to notifying NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may request that NISSAN con-
duct a recall campaign. However, Trans-
port Canada cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
dealer, or NISSAN.
You may contact Transport Canada’s De-
fect Investigations and Recalls Division
toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may
also report safety defects online at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/
7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng
(English speakers) or
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/
7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra
(French speakers)
Additional information concerning motor
vehicle safety may be obtained from Trans-
port Canada’s Road Safety Information
Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speak-
ers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere
(French speakers).
To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns
please contact our Consumer Information
Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.
Due to legal requirements in some Canadian
Provinces, your vehicle may be required to be in
what is called the “ready condition” for an
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emis-
sion control system.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it
is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,
the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary
usage of the vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or
the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be
reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the
I/M test, check the vehicle’s
inspection/maintenance test readiness condi-
tion. Place the ignition switch in the ON position
without starting the engine. If the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 sec-
onds and then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test
condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not blink
after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is
“ready”. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer to set the “ready condition” or to
prepare the vehicle for testing.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
Technical and consumer information 10-19
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-
corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR
is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:
● How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
● Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
● How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
● How fast the vehicle was traveling.
● Sounds are not recorded.
These data can help provide a better understand-
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by
your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-
ment is required and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-
facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have ac-
cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only
be accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-
mitted by law.
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model
year and prior can be purchased. A Genuine
NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of
service and repair information for your vehicle.
This manual is the same one used by the factory-
trained technicians working at NISSAN dealer-
ships. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can
also be purchased.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of Genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of Genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Ser-
vice Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this model
year and prior, please contact the nearest
NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and loca-
tion of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the
NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122
and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist
you.
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
10-20 Technical and consumer information
11 Index
A
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system).....................1-41
Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact
air bag system) ...............1-48
Side and curtain (See supplemental
side air bag and curtain side-impact
air bag system) ...............1-55
Airbagwarninglabels.............1-58
Airbagwarninglight...........1-58,2-10
Air bag warning light, supplemental . .1-58, 2-10
Air cleaner housing filter ............8-14
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation ......4-11,4-19
Air conditioner service ...........4-24
Air conditioner specification label ....10-12
Air conditioner system refrigerant and
oil recommendations ............10-7
Air conditioner system refrigerant
recommendations..............10-7
Heater and air conditioner
controls ................4-8,4-16
Servicing air conditioner ..........4-24
Airflowcharts..............4-12,4-20
Alarm system
(See vehicle security system) .........2-13
Anchor point locations .............1-25
Antenna .....................4-46
Anti-lock brake warning light ..........2-8
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)........5-22
Audible reminders ...............2-13
Audio system ..................4-24
AMradioreception.............4-25
Compact disc (CD) player .....4-35,4-39
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player.................4-32,4-36
FMradioreception.............4-24
iPod® Player ................4-43
iPod® player operation...........4-43
Radio ....................4-24
Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-45
USB interface ................4-41
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection
Port.....................4-41
Automatic
Automatic power window switch .....2-27
Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) .....8-8
Automatic transmission position indicator
light.....................2-10
Driving with automatic transmission.....5-8
Transmission shift lever lock release....5-11
Automatic door locks ..............3-5
AUXjack.................4-36,4-40
B
Battery ..................5-25,8-10
Chargewarninglight.............2-8
Battery replacement ..............8-20
Keyfob................8-20,8-20
Before starting the engine ............5-7
Belt (See drive belt) ..............8-12
Block heater
Engine ....................5-26
Bluetooth® hands-free phone system ....4-47
Boosterseats..................1-38
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)......5-22
Brake assist (for Intelligent cruise control
system) ...................5-23
Brake fluid ..................8-9
Brakelight(Seestoplight).........8-26
Brake system ................5-21
Brakewarninglight..............2-8
Brakewearindicators........2-13,8-16
Parking brake operation ..........5-14
Self-adjusting brakes ............8-16
Brake fluid ....................8-9
Brakes ......................8-16
Brake system ..................5-21
Break-inschedule ...............5-17
Brightness control
Instrument panel ..............2-19
Bulb check/instrument panel ..........2-7
Bulbreplacement................8-26
C
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants ..................
10-2
Cargo (See vehicle loading information). . .10-13
Car phone or CB radio .............4-47
CDcareandcleaning.............4-45
CD player (See audio system) .....4-35,4-39
Child restraints .......1-19,1-20,1-21,1-23
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System ..............1-23
Precautions on child
restraints.........1-22,1-28,1-33,1-38
Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-25
Child safety rear door lock ............3-5
Chimes, audible reminders ...........2-13
Cleaningexteriorandinterior........7-2,7-4
Clock setting
(models without Navigation System) . .4-34, 4-38
Clutch
Clutch fluid...................8-9
C.M.V.S.S. certification label .........10-11
Cold weather driving...............5-25
Compact disc (CD) player ........4-35,4-39
Controls
Audiocontrols(steeringwheel).......4-45
Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-8, 4-16
Coolant
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants ................10-2
Changing engine coolant ...........8-5
Checking engine coolant level ........8-5
Corrosionprotection...............7-6
Cruisecontrol..................5-15
Cupholders................2-23,2-24
Curtain side-impact air bag system
(See supplemental side air bag and curtain
side-impact air bag system)...........1-55
D
Daytime light system...............2-18
Defroster switch
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch.....................2-17
Dimensionsandweights ............10-9
Dimmer switch for instrument panel ......2-19
Door locks .....................3-3
Door open warning light .............2-9
Doors........................3-3
Drive belt .....................8-12
Driving
Cold weather driving.............5-25
Driving with automatic transmission .....5-8
Driving with manual transmission ......5-13
Precautions when starting and driving ....5-2
Driving the vehicle .................5-8
E
Economy - fuel ..................5-18
Emission control information label ......10-11
Emission control system warranty.......10-18
Engine
Before starting the engine ..........5-7
Block heater .................5-26
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants ................10-2
Changingenginecoolant...........8-5
Changingengineoil..............8-7
Changing engine oil filter ...........8-8
Checking engine coolant level ........8-5
Checking engine oil level ...........8-6
Engine compartment check locations ....8-3
Engine cooling system ............8-4
Engineoil ...................8-6
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .10-6
Engine oil pressure warning light.......2-9
Engine oil viscosity..............10-7
Engine serial number............10-11
Engine specifications ............10-8
Starting the engine ..............5-7
Event Data recorders .............10-20
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .........5-2
Explanation of maintenance items ........9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . .9-5
Extended storage switch ............8-19
F
Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . .6-2
Flat tire .......................
6-2
Floor mat positioning aid .............7-5
Fluid
Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ......8-8
Brake fluid ...................8-9
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants................10-2
Clutch fluid...................8-9
Enginecoolant.................8-4
Engineoil ...................8-6
Front air bag system
(See supplemental restraint system) ......1-48
Frontseats.....................1-2
Fuel
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants................10-2
Fuel economy ................5-18
Fuel-filler cap.................3-10
Fuel-filler lid .................3-10
Fuelgauge...................2-5
Fuel octane rating ..............10-5
11-2
Fuel recommendation ............10-4
Loose fuel cap warning ............2-5
Fuel efficient driving tips.............5-17
Fuel-filler door ..................3-10
Fuel gauge .....................2-5
Fuses.......................8-17
Fusible links ...................8-17
G
Gascap .....................3-10
Gauge
Fuel gauge ...................2-5
Odometer ...................2-4
Speedometer .................2-4
Tachometer ..................2-5
Trip computer .................2-6
Trip odometer .................2-4
General maintenance ...............9-2
Glovebox.....................2-23
H
Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth® ....4-47
Hazard warning flasher switch ..........6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch ........2-17
Headlightcontrolswitch ............2-17
Headlights....................8-21
Head restraints ..................1-6
Heater
Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-8, 4-16
Heater operation ...........4-10,4-18
Hood ........................3-8
Horn .......................2-20
I
Ignition switch ...................5-5
Immobilizer system .............2-13,5-7
Important vehicle information label ......10-11
In-cabin microfilter ................8-14
Increasing fuel economy.............5-18
Indicator lights and audible reminders
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders) ....................2-10
Instrument brightness control ..........2-19
Instrument panel ...............0-6,2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch ........2-19
Interiorlight....................2-28
iPod® Player ...................4-43
ISOFIX child restraints .............1-23
J
Jump starting ...............6-10,8-12
K
Key.........................3-2
Key fob battery replacement .......8-20,8-20
Keyless entry
Without Intelligent Key system
(See remote keyless entry system) . . .3-5, 3-6
Keys
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. .3-2
L
Labels
Air conditioner specification label .....10-12
C.M.V.S.S. certification label .......10-11
Emission control information label ....10-11
Engine serial number............10-11
Tire and Loading Information label ....10-12
Vehicle identification number (VIN) ....10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate .....................10-10
Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-58
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
System ......................1-23
License plate
Installing the license plate .........10-12
Light
A
irbagwarninglight.........1-58,2-10
Brake light (See stop light) .........8-26
Bulb check/instrument panel .........2-7
Bulb replacement ..............8-26
Charge warning light .............2-8
Exterior and Interior lights ..........8-26
Foglights...................8-25
Headlightandturnsignalswitch......2-17
Headlight control switch ..........2-17
Headlights..................8-21
Interior light..................2-28
Lightbulbs..................8-21
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light.......................2-9
Passenger air bag and status light .....1-50
Security indicator light............2-12
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders...................2-10
11-3
Lights.......................8-21
Lock
Child safety rear door lock ..........3-5
Door locks ...................3-3
Power door locks ...............3-4
Loose fuel cap warning ..............2-5
Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . .2-9
Luggage (See vehicle loading information). .10-13
M
Maintenance
Generalmaintenance.............9-2
Insidethevehicle...............9-3
Maintenanceprecautions...........8-2
Outsidethevehicle..............9-2
Seat belt maintenance............1-18
Under the hood and vehicle .........9-4
Maintenance log .................9-13
Maintenance requirements ............9-2
Maintenance schedules..............9-7
Maintenance under severe operation
conditions ....................9-12
Malfunctionindicatorlight............2-11
Manual front seat adjustment ...........1-3
Manual windows .................2-28
Map pocket....................2-22
Meters and gauges ................2-3
Instrument brightness control ........2-19
Mirror
Outside mirror control ............3-15
Outside mirrors ............3-14,3-15
Rearview ...................3-14
Vanity mirror .................3-13
Mirrors ......................3-14
N
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . .2-13, 5-7
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) .....10-5
Odometer .....................2-4
Oil
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants ................10-2
Changingengineoil..............8-7
Changing engine oil filter ...........8-8
Checking engine oil level ...........8-6
Engineoil ...................8-6
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .10-6
Engine oil viscosity..............10-7
Oneshotcall...................4-50
Outside mirror control ..............3-15
Outside mirrors ..............3-14,3-15
Overdrive switch .................5-12
Overheat
If your vehicle overheats ...........6-12
Owner’s manual order form ..........10-20
Owner’s manual/service manual order
information ...................10-20
P
Parking
Parking brake operation ...........5-14
Parking/parking on hills ...........5-19
Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free system.....4-47
Power
Power door locks ...............3-4
Poweroutlet.................2-21
Power rear windows .............2-27
Power steering system ...........5-20
Power windows ...............2-26
Rear power windows ............2-27
Poweroutlet...................2-21
Power steering ..................5-20
Precautions
Maintenance precautions ...........8-2
Precautions on booster
seats...........1-22,1-28,1-33,1-38
Precautions on child
restraints.........1-22,1-28,1-33,1-38
Precautionsonseatbeltusage.......1-10
Precautions
on supplemental restraint
system ....................1-41
Precautions when starting and driving ....5-2
Push starting ...................6-12
R
Radio
CarphoneorCBradio...........4-47
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player .................4-32,4-36
Steering wheel audio control switch ....4-45
Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)
test.......................10-19
Rearcenterseatbelt ..............1-15
Rear hatch .....................3-9
Rear power windows ..............2-27
Rearseat......................1-4
Rearview mirror .................3-14
11-4
RearViewMonitor.................4-2
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch.......................2-17
Rear window wiper and washer switches . . .2-16
Recommended Fluids ..............10-2
Recorders
EventData.................10-20
Refrigerant recommendation ..........10-7
Registering a vehicle in another country . . .10-10
Remote keyless entry system ........3-5,3-6
Reporting safety defects (US only) ......10-19
S
Safety
Child safety rear door lock ..........3-5
Childseatbelts.....1-22,1-28,1-33,1-38
Reporting safety defects (US only) ....10-19
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment ........1-3
Rear seat adjustment .............1-4
Seat belt
Child safety..................1-19
Infantsandsmallchildren..........1-20
InjuredPerson................1-13
Largerchildren................1-20
Precautionsonseatbeltusage.......1-10
Pregnant women...............1-13
Rear center seat belt ............1-15
Seat belt extenders .............1-18
Seat belt maintenance............1-18
Seat belts ................1-10,7-6
Shoulder belt height adjustment ......1-18
Three-point type with retractor .......1-13
Seat belt extenders ...............1-18
Seat belt warning light ..........1-12,2-10
Seats
Adjustment...................1-2
Front seats ...................1-2
Manual front seat adjustment .........1-3
Rear seat....................1-4
Security indicator light..............2-12
Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System), engine start ...........2-13,5-7
Security systems
Vehicle security system ...........2-13
Self-adjusting brakes ..............8-16
Service manual order form...........10-20
Servicing air conditioner.............4-24
Shifting
Automatic transmission ...........5-10
Manual transmission .............5-13
Shift lock release.................5-11
Shoulder belt height adjustment ........1-18
Side air bag system (See supplemental
side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag
system) ......................1-55
Spark plug replacement .............8-13
Sparkplugs ...................8-13
Specifications ..................10-8
Speedometer ...................2-4
Speedometer and odometer ...........2-4
SRS warning label ................1-58
Stability control .................5-23
Standard maintenance ..............9-7
Starting
Before starting the engine ..........5-7
Jump starting .............6-10,8-12
Precautions when starting and driving ....5-2
Push starting .................6-12
Starting the engine ..............5-7
Starting the engine ................5-7
Steering
P
ower steering system ...........5-20
Tilting steering wheel ............3-12
Steeringwheel..................3-12
Steeringwheelaudiocontrolswitch......4-45
Stoplight.....................8-26
Storage......................2-22
Storage tray ...................2-22
Sun visors ....................3-12
Supplemental air bag warning labels ......1-58
Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-58, 2-10
Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-48
Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels .......1-58
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system ....................1-41
Supplemental restraint system
(Supplemental air bag system) .........1-41
Supplemental side and curtain side-impact
air bag system ..................1-55
Switch
Automatic power window switch ......2-27
Hazard warning flasher switch ........6-2
Headlightandturnsignalswitch......2-17
Headlight control switch ..........2-17
Ignition switch .................5-5
Instrument brightness control ........2-19
Overdrive switch ...............5-12
Powerdoorlockswitch............3-4
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch.....................2-17
Rear window wiper and washer switches
. .2-16
Turnsignalswitch..............2-19
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off
switch.....................2-21
11-5
T
Tachometer ....................2-5
Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),
engine start .................2-13,5-7
Three-way catalyst ................5-2
Tilting steering wheel ..............3-12
Tire
Flat tire .....................6-2
Spare tire ................6-3,8-39
Tire and Loading Information label ....10-12
Tire chains ..................8-37
Tirepressure.............8-31,8-31
Tirerotation..................8-37
Types of tires .................8-36
Uniform tire quality grading ........10-17
Wheels and tires ...........8-31,10-9
Wheel/tire size ................10-9
Towing
Flattowing.................10-17
Trailertowing................10-17
Towing a trailer .................10-17
Towingyourvehicle...............6-13
Transmission
Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ......8-8
Driving with automatic transmission .....5-8
Driving with manual transmission ......5-13
Shiftleverlockrelease............5-11
Travel (See registering a vehicle in another
country) .....................10-10
Trip computer ...................2-6
Trip odometer ...................2-4
Turnsignalswitch................2-19
U
Uniform tire quality grading ..........10-17
USB interface ..................4-41
Audio file operation .............4-42
V
Vanity mirror ...................3-13
Vehicle dimensions and weights ........10-9
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-21
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system.....5-23
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ....5-23
Vehicle identification ..............10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN) ......10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number) ...............10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . .10-10
Vehicle immobilizer system ........2-13,5-7
Vehicle loading information ......10-13,10-14
Vehicle recovery .................6-15
Vehicle security system .............2-13
Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System), engine start .....2-13,5-7
Ventilators .....................4-8
Visors.......................3-12
Voice Prompt Interrupt..............4-50
W
Warning
Air bag warning light .........1-58,2-10
Anti-lock brake warning light .........2-8
Battery charge warning light .........2-8
Brake warning light ..............2-8
Door open warning light ...........2-9
Engine oil pressure warning light.......2-9
Hazard warning flasher switch ........6-2
Loose fuel cap warning ............2-5
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light.......................2-9
Passenger air bag and status light .....
1-50
Seat belt warning light ........1-12,2-10
Supplemental air bag warning
light ..................1-58,2-10
Vehicle security system ...........2-13
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders...................2-10
Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-58
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders.....................2-10
Audible reminders ..............2-10
Indicatorlights................2-10
Warninglights................2-10
Warninglights..................2-10
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders .....................2-7
Washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer
switches ...................2-16
Weights(Seedimensionsandweights)....10-9
Wheels and tires .............8-31,10-9
Wheel/tire size ..................10-9
When traveling or registering in another
country .....................10-10
Windows .....................2-26
Locking passengers’ windows .......2-27
Manual windows ...............2-28
Power rear windows .............2-27
Power windows ...............2-26
11-6
Rear power windows ............2-27
Windshield-washerfluid.............8-10
Windshield wiper blades ............8-15
Wiper
Rear window wiper and washer
switches ...................2-16
Wiperblades.................8-15
Wiperandwasherswitch............2-15
11-7
FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-
ber (Research octane number 91).
CAUTION
● Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
● Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
● Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your
vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to
run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or
E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically
designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-
versely affect the emission control de-
vices and systems of the vehicle. Dam-
age caused by such fuel is not covered
by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
● Do not use fuel that contains the octane
booster methylcyclopentadienyl man-
ganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel
containing MMT may adversely affect
vehicle performance and vehicle emis-
sions. Not all fuel dispensers are la-
beled to indicate MMT content, so you
may have to consult your gasoline re-
tailer for more details. Note that Fed-
eral and California laws prohibit the use
of MMT in reformulated gasoline.
● U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-
fied by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbrevia-
tion or the appropriate percentage for
that region.
For additional information, refer to “Recom-
mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.
ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 5W-30 SN” is rec-
ommended.
• If the above motor is not available, use an
equivalent motor oil that matches the above
grade and viscosity. For additional information,
refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-
tions” in the “Technical and consumer informa-
tion” section of this manual.
COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
For additional information, refer to “Tire and
Loading Information label” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.
The label is typically located on the driver side
center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional
information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 2,000 km (1,200 mi) of vehicle
use, follow the recommendations outlined in the
“Break-in schedule” information found in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual. Fol-
low these recommendations for the future reli-
ability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure
to follow these recommendations may result in
vehicle damage or shortened engine life.
GAS STATION INFORMATION
K13-D
'17
Printing : September 2016
Publication No.: 0C11U0
Printed in U.S.A.
O
M17EM 0K13U0
